]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blob - gcc/doc/tm.texi.in
Add D front-end, libphobos library, and D2 testsuite.
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * D Language and ABI:: Controlling D ABI changes.
56 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
57 * Misc:: Everything else.
58 @end menu
59
60 @node Target Structure
61 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
62 @cindex target hooks
63 @cindex target functions
64
65 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
66 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
67 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
68 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
69 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
70 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
71 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
72 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
73 @smallexample
74 #include "target.h"
75 #include "target-def.h"
76
77 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
78
79 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
80 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
81
82 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
83 @end smallexample
84 @end deftypevar
85
86 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
87 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
88 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
89 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
90 @code{targetm} structure.
91
92 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
93 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
94 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
95 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
96 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
97 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
98 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
99
100 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
101 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
102 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
103 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
104 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
105 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
106 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
107 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
108 default definition is used.
109
110 Similarly, there is a @code{targetdm} variable for hooks that are
111 specific to the D language front end, documented as ``D Target Hook''.
112 This is declared in @file{d/d-target.h}, the initializer
113 @code{TARGETDM_INITIALIZER} in @file{d/d-target-def.h}. If targets
114 initialize @code{targetdm} themselves, they should set
115 @code{target_has_targetdm=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default
116 definition is used.
117
118 @node Driver
119 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
120 @cindex driver
121 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
122
123 @c prevent bad page break with this line
124 You can control the compilation driver.
125
126 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
127 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
128 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
129
130 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
131 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
132 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
133 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
134 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
135 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
136
137 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
138 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
139 that the other specs are easier to write.
140
141 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
142 @end defmac
143
144 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
145 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
146 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
147 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
148 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
149
150 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
151 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
152 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
153 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
154 everywhere it occurs.
155
156 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
157 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
158 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
159
160 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
161 @end defmac
162
163 @defmac CPP_SPEC
164 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
165 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
166 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
167
168 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
169 @end defmac
170
171 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
172 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
173 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
174 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
175 @end defmac
176
177 @defmac CC1_SPEC
178 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
179 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
180 front ends.
181 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
182 for GCC to pass to front ends.
183
184 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
185 @end defmac
186
187 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
188 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
189 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
190 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
191
192 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
193 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
194 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
195 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
200 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
201 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
202 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
208 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
209 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
210 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
211 an example of this.
212
213 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
214 @end defmac
215
216 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
217 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
218 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
219 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
220 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
221 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
222
223 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
224 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
225 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
226 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
227 @end defmac
228
229 @defmac LINK_SPEC
230 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
231 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
232 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
233
234 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIB_SPEC
238 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
239 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
240 command given to the linker.
241
242 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
243 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
244 @end defmac
245
246 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
247 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
248 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
249 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
250 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
251
252 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
253 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
254 @end defmac
255
256 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
257 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
258 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
259 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
260 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
261 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
262 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
263 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
264 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
265 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
269 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
270 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
271 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
272 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
273 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
274 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
275 @end defmac
276
277 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
278 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
279 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
280 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
281 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
288
289 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
290 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
291 @end defmac
292
293 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
294 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
295 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
296 the very end of the command given to the linker.
297
298 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
299 @end defmac
300
301 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
302 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
303 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
304 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
305 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
306 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
307 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
308 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
309 @end defmac
310
311 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
312 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
313 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
314 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
315 @end defmac
316
317 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
318 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
319 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
320 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
321 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
322 @end defmac
323
324 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
325 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
326 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
327 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
328
329 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
330 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
331 string constant that provides the specification.
332
333 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
334
335 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
336 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
337 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
338 these definitions.
339
340 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
341 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
342 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
343 used.
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
346
347 @smallexample
348 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
349 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
350
351 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
352 @end smallexample
353
354 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
355 @smallexample
356 #undef CPP_SPEC
357 #define CPP_SPEC \
358 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
359 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
360 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
361 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
362
363 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
364 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
365 @end smallexample
366
367 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
368 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
369
370 @smallexample
371 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
372 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
373 @end smallexample
374 @end defmac
375
376 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
377 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
378 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
379 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
380 @end defmac
381
382 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
383 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
384 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
385 @end defmac
386
387 @defmac POST_LINK_SPEC
388 Define this macro to add additional steps to be executed after linker.
389 The default value of this macro is empty string.
390 @end defmac
391
392 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
393 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
394 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
395 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
396 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
397 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
398 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
399 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
400 @end defmac
401
402 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
403
404 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
405 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
406 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
407 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
408 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
409
410 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
411 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
412 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
413 @xref{Target Fragment}.
414 @end defmac
415
416 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
417 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
418 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
419 indicates an absolute file name.
420 @end defmac
421
422 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
423 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
424 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
425 when the compiler is built as a cross
426 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
427 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
428 @end defmac
429
430 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
431 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
432 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
433 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
434 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
435 is built as a cross compiler.
436 @end defmac
437
438 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
439 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
440 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
441 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
442 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
443 is built as a cross compiler.
444 @end defmac
445
446 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
447 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
448 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
449 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
450 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
451 is built as a cross compiler.
452 @end defmac
453
454 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
455 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
456 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
457 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
458 @end defmac
459
460 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
461 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
462 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
463 cross compiler.
464 @end defmac
465
466 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
467 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
468 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
469 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
470 initialize the necessary environment variables.
471 @end defmac
472
473 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
474 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
475 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
476 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
477 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
478 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
479
480 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
481 replacement.
482 @end defmac
483
484 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
485 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
486 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
487 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
488 @end defmac
489
490 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
491 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
492 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
493 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
494 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
495 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
496 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
497 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
498 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
499
500 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
501 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
502 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
503 for C++-only directories,
504 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
505 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
506 the array with a null element.
507
508 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
509 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
510 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
511 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
512
513 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
514
515 @smallexample
516 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
517 @{ \
518 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
519 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
520 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
521 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
522 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
523 @}
524 @end smallexample
525 @end defmac
526
527 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
528
529 @enumerate
530 @item
531 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
532
533 @item
534 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
535 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
536 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
537
538 @item
539 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
540
541 @item
542 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
543 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
544
545 @item
546 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
547
548 @item
549 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
550
551 @item
552 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
553 compiler.
554 @end enumerate
555
556 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
557
558 @enumerate
559 @item
560 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
561
562 @item
563 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
564 value based on the installed toolchain location.
565
566 @item
567 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
568 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
569
570 @item
571 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
572 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
573
574 @item
575 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
576
577 @item
578 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
579 compiler.
580
581 @item
582 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
583 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
587 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
588
589 @item
590 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
591 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
592 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
593
594 @item
595 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
596 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
597 @file{/lib/}.
598
599 @item
600 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
601 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
602 @file{/usr/lib/}.
603 @end enumerate
604
605 @node Run-time Target
606 @section Run-time Target Specification
607 @cindex run-time target specification
608 @cindex predefined macros
609 @cindex target specifications
610
611 @c prevent bad page break with this line
612 Here are run-time target specifications.
613
614 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
615 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
616 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
617 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
618 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
619 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
620 finished command line option processing your code can use those
621 results freely.
622
623 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
624 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
625 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
626 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
627
628 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
629 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
630 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
631 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
632 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
633 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
634 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
635 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
636 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
637 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
638
639 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
640 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
641 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
642 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
643 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
644 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
645 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
646 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
647 preprocessing.
648 @end defmac
649
650 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
651 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
652 and is used for the target operating system instead.
653 @end defmac
654
655 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
656 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
657 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
658 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
659 it yourself.
660 @end defmac
661
662 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
663 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
664 any target-specific headers.
665 @end deftypevar
666
667 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
668 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
669 Its default setting is 0.
670 @end deftypevr
671
672 @cindex optional hardware or system features
673 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
674
675 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
676 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
677 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
678 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
679 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
680 definition does nothing but return true.
681
682 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
683 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
684 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
685 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
686 via attributes).
687 @end deftypefn
688
689 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
690 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
691 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
692 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
693 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
694 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
695 default definition does nothing but return false.
696
697 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
698 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
699 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
700 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
701 @end deftypefn
702
703 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
704
705 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
706
707 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
708
709 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
710
711 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
712
713 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
714
715 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
716 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
717 but is only used in the C
718 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
719 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
720 frontends.
721 @end defmac
722
723 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
724 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
725 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
726 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
727 options are processed once
728 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
729 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
730 options passed explicitly.
731
732 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
733 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
734 @code{optimize} attribute.
735 @end deftypevr
736
737 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
738
739 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
740
741 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALIDATE_PARAM
742
743 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
744 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
745 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
746 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
747 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
748 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
749
750 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
751 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
752 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
753 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
754 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
755 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
756 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
757
758 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
759 is 0.
760 @end defmac
761
762 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
763
764 @node Per-Function Data
765 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
766 @cindex per-function data
767 @cindex data structures
768
769 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
770 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
771 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
772 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
773 when another one comes along.
774
775 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
776 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
777 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
778 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
779 to their own specific data.
780
781 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
782 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
783 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
784 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
785
786 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
787 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
788 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
789 function, for level 0.
790
791 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
792 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
793 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
794 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
795 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
796 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
797 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
798 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
799 longer supported.
800
801 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
802 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
803 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
804 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
805 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
806 @end defmac
807
808 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
809 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
810 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
811 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
812 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
813 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
814
815 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
816 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
817 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
818 @end deftypevar
819
820 @node Storage Layout
821 @section Storage Layout
822 @cindex storage layout
823
824 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
825 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
826 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
827 @xref{Run-time Target}.
828
829 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
830 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
831 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
832 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
833 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
834 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
835 macro need not be a constant.
836
837 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
838 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
839 @end defmac
840
841 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
842 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
843 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
844 @end defmac
845
846 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
847 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
848 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
849 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
850 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
851 macro need not be a constant.
852 @end defmac
853
854 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
855 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
856 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
857 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
858 the order of words in memory.
859 @end defmac
860
861 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
862 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
863 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
864 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
865 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
866
867 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
868 multi-word integers.
869 @end defmac
870
871 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
872 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
873 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
874 @end defmac
875
876 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
877 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
878 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
879 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
880 @end defmac
881
882 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
883 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
884 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
885 @end defmac
886
887 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
888 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
889 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
890 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
891 @end defmac
892
893 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
894 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
895 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
896 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
897 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
898 @end defmac
899
900 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
901 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
902 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
903 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
904 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
905 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
906 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
907
908 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
909 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
910 @end defmac
911
912 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
913 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
914 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
915 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
916 scalar type.
917
918 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
919 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
920 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
921 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
922 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
923 counterparts.
924
925 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
926 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
927 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
928 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
929 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
930 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
931
932 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
933 @end defmac
934
935 @hook TARGET_C_EXCESS_PRECISION
936
937 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
938
939 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
940 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
941 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
942 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
943 size of an integer.
944 @end defmac
945
946 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
947 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
948 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
949 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
950 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
951 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
952 @end defmac
953
954 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
955 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
956 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
957 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
958 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
959 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
960 @end defmac
961
962 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
963 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
964 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
965 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
966 @end defmac
967
968 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
969 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
970 @end defmac
971
972 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
973 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
974 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
975 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
976 @end defmac
977
978 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
979
980 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
981 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
982 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
983 @end defmac
984
985 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
986 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
987 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
988 @end defmac
989
990 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
991 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
992 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
993 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
994 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
995 @end defmac
996
997 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
998 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
999 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
1000 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
1001 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
1002 @end defmac
1003
1004 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{type}, @var{computed})
1005 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} of
1006 type @var{type} if the alignment computed in the usual way (including
1007 applying of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
1008 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
1009 field alignment has not been set by the
1010 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. Note that @var{field}
1011 may be @code{NULL_TREE} in case we just query for the minimum alignment
1012 of a field of type @var{type} in structure context.
1013 @end defmac
1014
1015 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1016 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
1017 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1018
1019 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1020
1021 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1022 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1023 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1024 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1025 @end defmac
1026
1027 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1028 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1029 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1030 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1031 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1032
1033 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1034 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1035 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1036 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1037 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1038 @end defmac
1039
1040 @hook TARGET_STATIC_RTX_ALIGNMENT
1041
1042 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1043 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1044 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1045 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1046 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1047
1048 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1049
1050 @findex strcpy
1051 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1052 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1053 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1054 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1055 @end defmac
1056
1057 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1058 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1059 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1060 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1061 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1062
1063 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1064 @end defmac
1065
1066 @hook TARGET_CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
1067
1068 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1069 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1070 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1071 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1072 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1073
1074 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1075
1076 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1077 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1078
1079 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1080 @end defmac
1081
1082 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1083
1084 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1085 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1086 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1087 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1088 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1089 align the slot.
1090
1091 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1092 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1093 be used.
1094
1095 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1096 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1097
1098 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1099 @end defmac
1100
1101 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1102 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1103 variable @var{decl}.
1104
1105 If this macro is not defined, then
1106 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1107 is used.
1108
1109 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1110 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1111
1112 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1113 @end defmac
1114
1115 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1116 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1117 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1118 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1119
1120 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1121 @end defmac
1122
1123 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1124 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1125 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1126
1127 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1128 @end defmac
1129
1130 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1131 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1132 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1133
1134 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1135 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1136 @end defmac
1137
1138 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1139 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1140 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1141 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1142 @end defmac
1143
1144 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1145 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1146 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1147
1148 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1149 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1150 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1151 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1152 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1153
1154 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1155 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1156 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1157 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1158
1159 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1160 structure.
1161
1162 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1163 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1164
1165 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1166 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1167 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1168 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1169
1170 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1171 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1172 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1173
1174 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1175 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1176 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1177
1178 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1179 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1180 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1181
1182 @smallexample
1183 struct foo1
1184 @{
1185 char x;
1186 char :0;
1187 char y;
1188 @};
1189
1190 struct foo2
1191 @{
1192 char x;
1193 int :0;
1194 char y;
1195 @};
1196
1197 main ()
1198 @{
1199 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1200 sizeof (struct foo1));
1201 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1202 sizeof (struct foo2));
1203 exit (0);
1204 @}
1205 @end smallexample
1206
1207 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1208 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1209 @end defmac
1210
1211 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1212 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1213 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1214 @end defmac
1215
1216 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1217
1218 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1219
1220 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1221
1222 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1223 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1224 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1225 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1226 @var{specified}.
1227
1228 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1229 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1230 @end defmac
1231
1232 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1233 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1234 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1235 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1236 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1237 (DImode)} is assumed.
1238 @end defmac
1239
1240 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1241 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1242 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1243 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1244 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1245 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1246 having its mode specified.
1247
1248 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1249 would most commonly define this macro if the
1250 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1251 64-bit mode.
1252 @end defmac
1253
1254 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1255 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1256 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1257 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1258
1259 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1260 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1261 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1262 @end defmac
1263
1264 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1265
1266 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1267
1268 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1269
1270 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1271
1272 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1273
1274 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1275
1276 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1277
1278 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1279
1280 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1281
1282 @node Type Layout
1283 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1284
1285 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1286 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1287 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1288 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1289
1290 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1291 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1292 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1293 @end defmac
1294
1295 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1296 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1297 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1298 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1299 unit.)
1300 @end defmac
1301
1302 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1303 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1304 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1305 @end defmac
1306
1307 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1308 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1309 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1310 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1311 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1312 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1313 @end defmac
1314
1315 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1316 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1317 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1318 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1319 macro must be at least 64.
1320 @end defmac
1321
1322 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1323 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1324 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1325 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1326 @end defmac
1327
1328 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1329 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1330 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1331 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1332 @end defmac
1333
1334 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1335 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1336 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1337 @end defmac
1338
1339 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1340 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1341 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1342 words.
1343 @end defmac
1344
1345 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1346 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1347 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1348 words.
1349 @end defmac
1350
1351 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1352 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1353 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1354 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1355 @end defmac
1356
1357 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1358 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1359 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1360 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1361 @end defmac
1362
1363 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1364 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1365 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1366 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1367 @end defmac
1368
1369 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1370 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1371 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1372 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1373 @end defmac
1374
1375 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1376 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1377 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1378 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1379 @end defmac
1380
1381 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1382 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1383 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1384 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1385 @end defmac
1386
1387 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1388 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1389 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1390 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1391 @end defmac
1392
1393 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1394 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1395 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1396 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1397 @end defmac
1398
1399 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1400 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1401 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1402 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1403 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1404 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1405 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1406 @end defmac
1407
1408 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1409 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1410 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1411 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1412 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1413 is the default.
1414 @end defmac
1415
1416 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1417 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1418 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1419 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1420 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1421 @end defmac
1422
1423 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1424
1425 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1426 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1427 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1428 contents of the string.
1429
1430 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1431 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1432 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1433 of the data type names defined in the function
1434 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1435 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1436 compiler to crash on startup.
1437
1438 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1439 int"}.
1440 @end defmac
1441
1442 @defmac SIZETYPE
1443 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1444 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1445 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1446 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1447 is extracted.
1448
1449 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1450
1451 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1452 @end defmac
1453
1454 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1455 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1456 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1457 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1458 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1459
1460 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1461 @end defmac
1462
1463 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1464 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1465 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1466 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1467 information.
1468
1469 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1470 @end defmac
1471
1472 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1473 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1474 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1475 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1476 @end defmac
1477
1478 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1479 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1480 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1481 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1482 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1483 information.
1484
1485 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1486 @end defmac
1487
1488 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1489 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1490 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1491 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1492 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1493
1494 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1495 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1496 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1497 @end defmac
1498
1499 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1500 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1501 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1502 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1503 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1504
1505 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1506 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1507 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1508 int}.
1509 @end defmac
1510
1511 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1512 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1513 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1514 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1515 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1516 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1517 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1518 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1519 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1520 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1521 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1522 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1523 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1524 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1525 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1526 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1527 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1528 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1529 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1530 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1531 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1532 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1533 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1534 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1535 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1536 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1537 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1538 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1539 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1540 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1541 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1542 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1543 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1544 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1545 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1546 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1547 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1548
1549 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1550 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1551 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1552 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1553 these macros are null pointers.
1554 @end defmac
1555
1556 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1557 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1558 that looks like:
1559
1560 @smallexample
1561 struct @{
1562 union @{
1563 void (*fn)();
1564 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1565 @};
1566 ptrdiff_t delta;
1567 @};
1568 @end smallexample
1569
1570 @noindent
1571 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1572 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1573 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1574 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1575 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1576 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1577 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1578 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1579
1580 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1581 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1582 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1583 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1584 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1585 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1586 architecture, you should define this macro to
1587 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1588
1589 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1590 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1591 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1592 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1593 @end defmac
1594
1595 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1596 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1597 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1598 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1599 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1600 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1601 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1602
1603 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1604 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1605 @end defmac
1606
1607 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1608 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1609 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1610 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1611 when special alignment is necessary. */
1612 @end defmac
1613
1614 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1615 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1616 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1617 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1618 of words in each data entry.
1619 @end defmac
1620
1621 @node Registers
1622 @section Register Usage
1623 @cindex register usage
1624
1625 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1626 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1627
1628 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1629 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1630 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1631 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1632 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1633
1634 @menu
1635 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1636 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1637 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1638 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1639 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1640 @end menu
1641
1642 @node Register Basics
1643 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1644
1645 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1646 Registers have various characteristics.
1647
1648 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1649 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1650 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1651 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1652 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1653 @end defmac
1654
1655 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1656 @cindex fixed register
1657 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1658 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1659 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1660 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1661 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1662 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1663 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1664
1665 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1666 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1667 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1668
1669 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1670 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1671 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1672 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1673 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1674 @end defmac
1675
1676 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1677 @cindex call-used register
1678 @cindex call-clobbered register
1679 @cindex call-saved register
1680 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1681 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1682 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1683 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1684 function calls.
1685
1686 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1687 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1688 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1689 @end defmac
1690
1691 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1692 @cindex call-used register
1693 @cindex call-clobbered register
1694 @cindex call-saved register
1695 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1696 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1697 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1698 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1699 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1700 @end defmac
1701
1702 @cindex call-used register
1703 @cindex call-clobbered register
1704 @cindex call-saved register
1705 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1706
1707 @findex fixed_regs
1708 @findex call_used_regs
1709 @findex global_regs
1710 @findex reg_names
1711 @findex reg_class_contents
1712 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1713
1714 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1715 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1716 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1717 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1718 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1719 outbound register.
1720 @end defmac
1721
1722 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1723 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1724 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1725 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1726 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1727 register.
1728 @end defmac
1729
1730 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1731 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1732 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1733 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1734 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1735 gotos.
1736 @end defmac
1737
1738 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1739 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1740 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1741 @end defmac
1742
1743 @node Allocation Order
1744 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1745 @cindex order of register allocation
1746 @cindex register allocation order
1747
1748 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1749 Registers are allocated in order.
1750
1751 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1752 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1753 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1754 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1755
1756 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1757 (all else being equal).
1758
1759 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1760 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1761 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1762 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1763 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1764 @end defmac
1765
1766 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1767 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1768 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1769
1770 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1771 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1772 register; and so on.
1773
1774 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1775 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1776
1777 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1778 @end defmac
1779
1780 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1781 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1782 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1783 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1784 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1785 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1786 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1787 @end defmac
1788
1789 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1790 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1791 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1792 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1793 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1794 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1795 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1796 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1797
1798 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1799 @end defmac
1800
1801 @node Values in Registers
1802 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1803
1804 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1805 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1806 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1807
1808 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1809
1810 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1811 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1812 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1813 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1814 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1815 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1816 @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1817
1818 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1819 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1820 nonzero.
1821
1822 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1823 @code{subreg_get_info}
1824 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1825 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1826 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1827 registers and so not be representable.
1828 @end defmac
1829
1830 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1831 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1832 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1833 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1834 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1835 @end defmac
1836
1837 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1838 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1839 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1840 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1841 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1842 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1843 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1844 @end defmac
1845
1846 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1847
1848 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1849 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1850 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1851
1852 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1853 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1854 handler.
1855
1856 The default is always nonzero.
1857 @end defmac
1858
1859 @hook TARGET_MODES_TIEABLE_P
1860
1861 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1862
1863 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1864 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1865 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1866 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1867 @end defmac
1868
1869 @node Leaf Functions
1870 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1871
1872 @cindex leaf functions
1873 @cindex functions, leaf
1874 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1875 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1876 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1877 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1878 normally arrive.
1879
1880 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1881 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1882 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1883 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1884 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1885 functions''.
1886
1887 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1888 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1889 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1890 accomplish this.
1891
1892 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1893 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1894 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1895 function treatment.
1896
1897 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1898 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1899 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1900 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1901 in this vector.
1902
1903 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1904 the treatment of leaf functions.
1905 @end defmac
1906
1907 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1908 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1909 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1910
1911 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1912 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
1913 will cause the compiler to abort.
1914
1915 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1916 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1917 this.
1918 @end defmac
1919
1920 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1921 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1922 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
1923 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
1924 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
1925 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
1926 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
1927 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
1928 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
1929 functions which only use leaf registers.
1930 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
1931 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
1932 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1933 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1934 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1935
1936 @node Stack Registers
1937 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1938
1939 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1940 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
1941 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
1942 stack.
1943
1944 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1945 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
1946 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
1947 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
1948 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
1949 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
1950 with it, as well as defining these macros.
1951
1952 @defmac STACK_REGS
1953 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1954 @end defmac
1955
1956 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
1957 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
1958 the machine has any stack-like registers.
1959 @end defmac
1960
1961 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
1962 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1963 of the stack.
1964 @end defmac
1965
1966 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
1967 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1968 the stack.
1969 @end defmac
1970
1971 @node Register Classes
1972 @section Register Classes
1973 @cindex register class definitions
1974 @cindex class definitions, register
1975
1976 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1977 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1978 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1979 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1980
1981 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1982 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1983 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1984
1985 @findex ALL_REGS
1986 @findex NO_REGS
1987 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1988 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1989 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1990 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1991
1992 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1993 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1994 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1995 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1996 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1997 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1998
1999 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2000 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2001
2002 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2003 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2004 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2005 them in operand constraints.
2006
2007 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2008 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2009 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2010 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2011 (@pxref{Costs}).
2012
2013 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2014 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2015 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2016 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2017 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2018 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2019 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2020
2021 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2022 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2023 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2024 in their union.
2025
2026 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2027 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2028 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2029 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2030 specify this requirement is with @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2031
2032 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2033 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2034 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2035 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2036 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2037 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2038 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2039 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2040 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2041
2042 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2043 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2044 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2045 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2046 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2047 tells how many classes there are.
2048
2049 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2050 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2051 in many of the tables described below.
2052 @end deftp
2053
2054 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2055 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2056
2057 @smallexample
2058 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2059 @end smallexample
2060 @end defmac
2061
2062 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2063 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2064 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2065 @end defmac
2066
2067 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2068 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2069 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2070 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2071 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2072
2073 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2074 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2075 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2076 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2077 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2078 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2079 so on.
2080 @end defmac
2081
2082 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2083 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2084 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2085 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2086 register.
2087 @end defmac
2088
2089 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2090 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2091 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2092 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2093 @end defmac
2094
2095 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2096 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2097 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2098 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2099 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2100 @end defmac
2101
2102 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2103 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2104 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2105 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2106 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2107 @end defmac
2108
2109 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2110 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2111 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2112 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2113 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2114 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2115 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2116 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2117 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2118 @end defmac
2119
2120 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2121 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2122 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2123 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2124 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2125 @end defmac
2126
2127 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2128 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2129 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2130 @end defmac
2131
2132 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2133 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2134 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2135 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2136 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2137 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2138 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2139 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2140 @code{address_operand}.
2141 @end defmac
2142
2143 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2144 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2145 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2146 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2147 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2148 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2149 than other base register uses.
2150
2151 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2152 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2153 @end defmac
2154
2155 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2156 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2157 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2158 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2159 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2160 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2161 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2162 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2163 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2164 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2165 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2166 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2167 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2168 @end defmac
2169
2170 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2171 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2172 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2173 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2174 allocated such a hard register.
2175
2176 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2177 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2178 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2179 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2180 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2181 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2182 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2183 only if neither labeling works.
2184 @end defmac
2185
2186 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2187
2188 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2189
2190 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2191 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2192 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2193 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2194 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2195 safe:
2196
2197 @smallexample
2198 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2199 @end smallexample
2200
2201 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2202 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2203 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2204 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2205 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2206
2207 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2208 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2209 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2210 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2211 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2212 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2213 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2214 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant cannot be loaded
2215 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2216 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2217 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2218
2219 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2220 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2221 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2222 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2223 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2224 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2225 @end defmac
2226
2227 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2228
2229 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2230 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2231 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2232 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2233 ordinarily be used.
2234
2235 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2236 there are certain modes that simply cannot go in certain reload classes.
2237
2238 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2239 smaller class.
2240
2241 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2242 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2243 @end defmac
2244
2245 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2246
2247 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2248 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2249 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2250 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2251 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2252
2253 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2254 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2255 reload phase that it may
2256 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2257 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2258 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2259 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2260 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2261 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2262
2263 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2264 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2265 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2266 class required. If the
2267 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2268 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2269 macros identically.
2270
2271 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2272 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2273 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2274 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2275 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2276
2277 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2278 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2279 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2280 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2281 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2282 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2283 register.
2284
2285 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2286 register that
2287 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2288 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2289 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2290 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2291 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2292
2293 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2294 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2295 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2296 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2297
2298 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2299 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2300 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2301 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2302 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2303 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2304 general registers.
2305 @end defmac
2306
2307 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2308
2309 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2310 Normally when @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2311 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2312 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2313 defined by this macro.
2314
2315 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2316 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2317 @end defmac
2318
2319 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2320
2321 @hook TARGET_SELECT_EARLY_REMAT_MODES
2322
2323 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2324
2325 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2326
2327 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2328 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2329 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2330
2331 This is closely related to the macro @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2332 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2333 should be the maximum value of @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2334 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2335
2336 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2337 in the reload pass.
2338 @end defmac
2339
2340 @hook TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
2341
2342 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2343
2344 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2345
2346 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2347
2348 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2349
2350 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2351
2352 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2353
2354 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2355
2356 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2357
2358 @hook TARGET_ADDITIONAL_ALLOCNO_CLASS_P
2359
2360 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2361
2362 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_PRESSURE_CLASSES
2363
2364 @node Stack and Calling
2365 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2366 @cindex calling conventions
2367
2368 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2369 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2370
2371 @menu
2372 * Frame Layout::
2373 * Exception Handling::
2374 * Stack Checking::
2375 * Frame Registers::
2376 * Elimination::
2377 * Stack Arguments::
2378 * Register Arguments::
2379 * Scalar Return::
2380 * Aggregate Return::
2381 * Caller Saves::
2382 * Function Entry::
2383 * Profiling::
2384 * Tail Calls::
2385 * Shrink-wrapping separate components::
2386 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2387 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2388 @end menu
2389
2390 @node Frame Layout
2391 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2392 @cindex stack frame layout
2393 @cindex frame layout
2394
2395 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2396 Here is the basic stack layout.
2397
2398 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2399 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2400 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2401 @end defmac
2402
2403 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2404 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2405 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2406 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2407
2408 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2409 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2410 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2411 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2412 space for the next item on the stack.
2413
2414 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2415 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2416 which is often wrong.
2417 @end defmac
2418
2419 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2420 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2421 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2422 @end defmac
2423
2424 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2425 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2426 addresses on the stack.
2427 @end defmac
2428
2429 @hook TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2430
2431 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2432 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2433 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2434
2435 On ports where @code{TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2436 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2437 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2438 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2439 @end defmac
2440
2441 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2442 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2443 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2444 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2445
2446 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2447 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2448 @end defmac
2449
2450 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2451 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2452 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2453 function.
2454
2455 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2456 the first argument's address.
2457 @end defmac
2458
2459 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2460 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2461 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2462
2463 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2464 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2465 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2466 @end defmac
2467
2468 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2469 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2470 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2471 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2472 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2473 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2474 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2475 @end defmac
2476
2477 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2478 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2479 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2480 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2481 itself.
2482
2483 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2484 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2485 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2486 @end defmac
2487
2488 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2489 A C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2490 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2491 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2492 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2493 define this macro. The default is to do nothing.
2494 @end defmac
2495
2496 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2497
2498 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2499 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2500 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2501 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2502 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2503 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2504 @end defmac
2505
2506 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2507 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2508 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2509 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2510 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2511 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2512
2513 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2514 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2515 determine the return address of other frames.
2516 @end defmac
2517
2518 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2519 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2520 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2521 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2522 @end defmac
2523
2524 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2525 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2526 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2527 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2528 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2529 the stack.
2530
2531 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2532 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2533
2534 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2535 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2536 @end defmac
2537
2538 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2539 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2540 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2541 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2542 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2543
2544 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2545 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2546 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2547 over time.
2548 @end defmac
2549
2550 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2551 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2552 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2553 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2554 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2555 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2556 @end defmac
2557
2558 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2559
2560 @hook TARGET_DWARF_POLY_INDETERMINATE_VALUE
2561
2562 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2563 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2564 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2565 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2566 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2567 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2568
2569 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2570 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2571 @end defmac
2572
2573 @defmac DEFAULT_INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2574 Like @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}, but must be the same for all
2575 functions of the same ABI, and when using GAS @code{.cfi_*} directives
2576 must also agree with the default CFI GAS emits. Define this macro
2577 only if @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET} can have different values
2578 between different functions of the same ABI or when
2579 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET} does not agree with GAS default CFI.
2580 @end defmac
2581
2582 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2583 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2584 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2585 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2586 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2587 during virtual register instantiation.
2588
2589 The default value for this macro is
2590 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2591 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2592 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2593 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2594 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2595
2596 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2597 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2598 DWARF 2.
2599 @end defmac
2600
2601 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2602 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2603 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2604 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2605 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2606
2607 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2608 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2609 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2610 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2611 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2612 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2613 should be defined.
2614 @end defmac
2615
2616 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2617 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2618 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2619 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2620 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2621 @end defmac
2622
2623 @node Exception Handling
2624 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2625 @cindex exception handling
2626
2627 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2628 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2629 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2630 @var{N} registers are usable.
2631
2632 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2633 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2634 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2635 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2636 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2637
2638 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2639 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2640 @end defmac
2641
2642 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2643 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2644 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2645 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2646 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2647
2648 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2649 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2650
2651 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2652 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2653 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2654 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2655 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2656 that provided by DWARF 2.
2657 @end defmac
2658
2659 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2660 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2661 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2662 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2663
2664 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2665 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2666 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2667 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2668 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2669 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2670 target call frame.
2671
2672 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2673 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2674 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2675
2676 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2677 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2678 @end defmac
2679
2680 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2681 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2682 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2683 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2684 using it to return to the exception handler.
2685 @end defmac
2686
2687 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2688 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2689 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2690 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2691 and so may be read-only.
2692
2693 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2694 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2695 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2696 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2697
2698 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2699 represented directly.
2700 @end defmac
2701
2702 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2703 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2704 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2705 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2706 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2707
2708 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2709 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2710 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2711 to be emitted.
2712 @end defmac
2713
2714 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2715 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2716 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2717 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2718 through signal frames.
2719
2720 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2721 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2722 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2723 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2724 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2725 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2726 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2727 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2728 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2729
2730 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2731 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2732 @end defmac
2733
2734 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2735 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2736 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2737 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2738
2739 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2740 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2741 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2742 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2743 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2744 be updated in @var{fs}.
2745 @end defmac
2746
2747 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2748 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2749 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2750 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2751 @end defmac
2752
2753 @node Stack Checking
2754 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2755
2756 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2757 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2758 three ways:
2759
2760 @enumerate
2761 @item
2762 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2763 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2764 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2765 other special processing.
2766
2767 @item
2768 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2769 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2770 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2771 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2772 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2773 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2774 approach below.
2775
2776 @item
2777 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2778 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2779 @end enumerate
2780
2781 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2782 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2783 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2784 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2785
2786 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2787 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2788 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2789 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2790 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2791 value of this macro is zero.
2792 @end defmac
2793
2794 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2795 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2796 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2797 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2798 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2799 @end defmac
2800
2801 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2802 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2803 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2804 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2805 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2806 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2807 @end defmac
2808
2809 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2810 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2811 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2812 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2813 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2814 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2815 default value of this macro is zero.
2816 @end defmac
2817
2818 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2819 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2820 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2821 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2822 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2823 architectures and operating systems.
2824 @end defmac
2825
2826 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2827 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2828 in the opposite case.
2829
2830 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2831 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2832 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2833 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2834 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2835 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2836 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2837 @end defmac
2838
2839 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2840 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2841 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2842 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2843 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2844 use the default of four words.
2845 @end defmac
2846
2847 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2848 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2849 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2850 @option{-fstack-check}.
2851 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2852 normally not need to override that default.
2853 @end defmac
2854
2855 @hook TARGET_STACK_CLASH_PROTECTION_ALLOCA_PROBE_RANGE
2856
2857 @need 2000
2858 @node Frame Registers
2859 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2860
2861 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2862 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2863
2864 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2865 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2866 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2867 the hardware determines which register this is.
2868 @end defmac
2869
2870 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2871 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2872 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2873 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2874 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2875 @end defmac
2876
2877 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2878 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2879 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2880 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2881 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2882 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2883 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2884 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2885 used for the frame pointer.
2886
2887 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2888 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2889 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2890 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2891 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2892 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2893 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2894
2895 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2896 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2897 @end defmac
2898
2899 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2900 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2901 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2902 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2903 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2904 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2905 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2906 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2907 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2908 @end defmac
2909
2910 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2911 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2912 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
2913 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2914 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2915 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2916 @end defmac
2917
2918 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
2919 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2920 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
2921 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
2922 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2923 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2924 @end defmac
2925
2926 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2927 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2928 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2929 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2930 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2931 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2932 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2933
2934 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2935 address from the stack.
2936 @end defmac
2937
2938 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2939 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2940 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2941 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2942 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2943 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2944 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2945 not be defined.
2946
2947 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2948
2949 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2950 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
2951 @end defmac
2952
2953 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
2954
2955 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2956 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
2957 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
2958 DWARF2 exception handling.
2959
2960 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
2961 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
2962 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
2963 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
2964 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
2965 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
2966 registers that are not call-saved.
2967
2968 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2969 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
2970 @end defmac
2971
2972 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2973
2974 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
2975 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
2976
2977 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2978 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
2979 @end defmac
2980
2981 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
2982
2983 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
2984 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
2985 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
2986 column number to use instead.
2987 @end defmac
2988
2989 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
2990
2991 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
2992 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
2993 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
2994 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
2995 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
2996
2997 @end defmac
2998
2999 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3000
3001 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3002 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3003 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3004 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3005 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3006
3007 @end defmac
3008
3009 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3010
3011 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3012 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3013 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3014 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3015
3016 @end defmac
3017
3018 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3019
3020 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3021 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3022 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3023 defined and 0 otherwise.
3024
3025 @end defmac
3026
3027 @defmac DWARF_LAZY_REGISTER_VALUE (@var{regno}, @var{value})
3028 Define this macro if the target has pseudo DWARF registers whose
3029 values need to be computed lazily on demand by the unwinder (such as when
3030 referenced in a CFA expression). The macro returns true if @var{regno}
3031 is such a register and stores its value in @samp{*@var{value}} if so.
3032 @end defmac
3033
3034 @node Elimination
3035 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3036
3037 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3038 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3039
3040 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3041
3042 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3043 This macro specifies a table of register pairs used to eliminate
3044 unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.
3045
3046 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3047 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3048
3049 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3050 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3051 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3052 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3053 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3054
3055 In this case, you might specify:
3056 @smallexample
3057 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3058 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3059 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3060 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3061 @end smallexample
3062
3063 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3064 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3065 @end defmac
3066
3067 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3068
3069 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3070 This macro returns the initial difference between the specified pair
3071 of registers. The value would be computed from information
3072 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3073 registers @code{df_regs_ever_live_p} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3074 @end defmac
3075
3076 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_FRAME_LAYOUT
3077
3078 @node Stack Arguments
3079 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3080 @cindex arguments on stack
3081 @cindex stack arguments
3082
3083 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3084 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3085 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3086
3087 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3088
3089 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3090 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3091 outgoing arguments.
3092 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3093 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3094 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3095 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3096 @end defmac
3097
3098 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3099 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3100 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3101 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3102 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3103 @end defmac
3104
3105 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3106 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3107 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3108
3109 On some machines, the definition
3110
3111 @smallexample
3112 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3113 @end smallexample
3114
3115 @noindent
3116 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3117 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3118 alignment. Then the definition should be
3119
3120 @smallexample
3121 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3122 @end smallexample
3123
3124 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3125 @end defmac
3126
3127 @findex outgoing_args_size
3128 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3129 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3130 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3131 will be computed and placed into
3132 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3133 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3134 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3135
3136 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3137 is not proper.
3138 @end defmac
3139
3140 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3141 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3142 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3143 registers.
3144
3145 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3146 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3147 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3148 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3149 of the function.
3150
3151 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3152 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3153 which.
3154 @end defmac
3155 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3156 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3157
3158 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3159 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3160 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3161 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3162 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3163 @end defmac
3164
3165 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3166 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3167 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3168 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3169 if the function called is a library function.
3170
3171 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3172 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3173 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3174 @end defmac
3175
3176 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3177 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3178 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3179 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3180 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3181
3182 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3183 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3184 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3185 stack in its natural location.
3186 @end defmac
3187
3188 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3189
3190 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3191 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3192 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3193 when compiling a function call.
3194
3195 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3196 have been accumulated.
3197
3198 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3199 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3200 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3201 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3202 appropriate.
3203 @end defmac
3204
3205 @node Register Arguments
3206 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3207 @cindex arguments in registers
3208 @cindex registers arguments
3209
3210 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3211 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3212 the stack.
3213
3214 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3215
3216 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3217
3218 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3219
3220 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3221
3222 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3223
3224 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3225
3226 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3227
3228 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3229
3230 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3231 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3232 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3233 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3234 of bytes of argument so far.
3235
3236 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3237 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3238 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3239 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3240 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3241 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3242 @end defmac
3243
3244 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3245 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3246 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3247 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3248 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3249 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3250 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3251 @end defmac
3252
3253 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3254 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3255 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3256 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3257 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3258 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3259 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3260 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3261 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3262 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3263 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3264 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3265 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3266
3267 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3268 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3269 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3270 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3271 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3272 never both of them at once.
3273 @end defmac
3274
3275 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3276 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3277 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3278 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3279 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3280 0)} is used instead.
3281 @end defmac
3282
3283 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3284 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3285 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3286 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3287
3288 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3289 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3290 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3291 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3292 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3293 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3294 @end defmac
3295
3296 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3297
3298 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET
3299
3300 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
3301
3302 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3303 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3304 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3305 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3306 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3307 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3308 @end defmac
3309
3310 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3311 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3312 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3313 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3314 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3315 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3316 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3317 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3318 required.
3319 @end defmac
3320
3321 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3322
3323 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3324
3325 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3326 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3327 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3328 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3329 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3330 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3331 stack.
3332 @end defmac
3333
3334 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3335
3336 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3337
3338 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3339
3340 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3341
3342 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3343
3344 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3345
3346 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3347
3348 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3349
3350 @hook TARGET_TRANSLATE_MODE_ATTRIBUTE
3351
3352 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3353
3354 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3355
3356 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE
3357
3358 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3359
3360 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3361
3362 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_MODE
3363
3364 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_BUILTIN_P
3365
3366 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3367
3368 @node Scalar Return
3369 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3370 @cindex return values in registers
3371 @cindex values, returned by functions
3372 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3373
3374 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3375 values---values that can fit in registers.
3376
3377 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3378
3379 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3380 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3381 a new target instead.
3382 @end defmac
3383
3384 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3385 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3386 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3387
3388 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3389 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3390 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3391 compiled.
3392 @end defmac
3393
3394 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3395
3396 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3397 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3398 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3399
3400 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3401 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3402 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3403 suffices:
3404
3405 @smallexample
3406 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3407 @end smallexample
3408
3409 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3410 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3411 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3412
3413 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3414 for a new target instead.
3415 @end defmac
3416
3417 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3418
3419 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3420 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3421 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3422 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3423 @end defmac
3424
3425 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3426
3427 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3428
3429 @node Aggregate Return
3430 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3431 @cindex aggregates as return values
3432 @cindex large return values
3433 @cindex returning aggregate values
3434 @cindex structure value address
3435
3436 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3437 cases), the value is not returned according to
3438 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3439 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3440 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3441 address}.
3442
3443 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3444 memory.
3445
3446 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3447
3448 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3449 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3450 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3451 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3452 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3453 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3454 target hook.
3455
3456 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3457 @end defmac
3458
3459 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3460
3461 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3462 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3463 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3464 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3465
3466 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3467 pass an address to the subroutine.
3468
3469 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3470 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3471 @end defmac
3472
3473 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3474
3475 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3476
3477 @hook TARGET_EMPTY_RECORD_P
3478
3479 @hook TARGET_WARN_PARAMETER_PASSING_ABI
3480
3481 @node Caller Saves
3482 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3483
3484 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3485 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3486 must live across calls.
3487
3488 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3489 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3490 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3491 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3492 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3493 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3494 @end defmac
3495
3496 @node Function Entry
3497 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3498 @cindex function entry and exit
3499 @cindex prologue
3500 @cindex epilogue
3501
3502 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3503 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3504
3505 @hook TARGET_ASM_PRINT_PATCHABLE_FUNCTION_ENTRY
3506
3507 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3508
3509 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3510
3511 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3512
3513 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3514
3515 @itemize @bullet
3516 @item
3517 @findex pretend_args_size
3518 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3519 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3520 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3521 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3522 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3523 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3524 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3525 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3526 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3527 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3528
3529 @item
3530 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3531 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3532 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3533 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3534 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3535 a save area.
3536
3537 @item
3538 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3539 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3540 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3541 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3542
3543 @item
3544 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3545 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3546 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3547 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3548 @end itemize
3549
3550 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3551 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3552 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3553 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3554 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3555 default is 0.
3556
3557 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3558 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3559 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3560 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3561 @end defmac
3562
3563 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3564 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3565 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3566 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3567 @end defmac
3568
3569 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3570 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3571 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3572 on entry to an exception edge.
3573 @end defmac
3574
3575 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3576
3577 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3578
3579 @node Profiling
3580 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3581 @cindex profiling, code generation
3582
3583 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3584
3585 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3586 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3587 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3588
3589 @findex mcount
3590 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3591 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3592 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3593 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3594
3595 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3596 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3597 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3598 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3599 @end defmac
3600
3601 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3602 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3603 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3604 not support profiling.
3605 @end defmac
3606
3607 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3608 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3609 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3610 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3611 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3612 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3613 @end defmac
3614
3615 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3616 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3617 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3618 @end defmac
3619
3620 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3621
3622 @node Tail Calls
3623 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3624 @cindex tail calls
3625
3626 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3627
3628 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3629
3630 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3631
3632 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3633
3634 @node Shrink-wrapping separate components
3635 @subsection Shrink-wrapping separate components
3636 @cindex shrink-wrapping separate components
3637
3638 The prologue may perform a variety of target dependent tasks such as
3639 saving callee-saved registers, saving the return address, aligning the
3640 stack, creating a stack frame, initializing the PIC register, setting
3641 up the static chain, etc.
3642
3643 On some targets some of these tasks may be independent of others and
3644 thus may be shrink-wrapped separately. These independent tasks are
3645 referred to as components and are handled generically by the target
3646 independent parts of GCC.
3647
3648 Using the following hooks those prologue or epilogue components can be
3649 shrink-wrapped separately, so that the initialization (and possibly
3650 teardown) those components do is not done as frequently on execution
3651 paths where this would unnecessary.
3652
3653 What exactly those components are is up to the target code; the generic
3654 code treats them abstractly, as a bit in an @code{sbitmap}. These
3655 @code{sbitmap}s are allocated by the @code{shrink_wrap.get_separate_components}
3656 and @code{shrink_wrap.components_for_bb} hooks, and deallocated by the
3657 generic code.
3658
3659 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_GET_SEPARATE_COMPONENTS
3660
3661 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_COMPONENTS_FOR_BB
3662
3663 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_DISQUALIFY_COMPONENTS
3664
3665 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_PROLOGUE_COMPONENTS
3666
3667 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_EPILOGUE_COMPONENTS
3668
3669 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_SET_HANDLED_COMPONENTS
3670
3671 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3672 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3673 @cindex stack smashing protection
3674
3675 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3676
3677 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3678
3679 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_RUNTIME_ENABLED_P
3680
3681 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3682
3683 @hook TARGET_GET_VALID_OPTION_VALUES
3684
3685 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3686 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3687 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3688
3689 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3690
3691 @node Varargs
3692 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3693 @cindex varargs implementation
3694
3695 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3696 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3697 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3698 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3699 conditionals to include it.
3700
3701 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3702 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3703 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3704 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3705 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3706 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3707
3708 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3709 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3710 below.
3711
3712 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3713 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3714 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3715 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3716 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3717
3718 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3719 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3720 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3721 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3722
3723 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3724 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3725 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3726 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3727 to use them for its own purposes.
3728 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3729 @c 10feb93
3730 @end defmac
3731
3732 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3733 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3734 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3735 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3736 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3737 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3738 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3739 of the current function.
3740 @end defmac
3741
3742 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3743 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3744 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3745 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3746 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3747 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3748
3749 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3750 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3751 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3752
3753 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3754 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3755 @end defmac
3756
3757 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3758
3759 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3760
3761 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3762
3763 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3764
3765 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3766
3767 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3768
3769 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3770
3771 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3772
3773 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3774
3775 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3776
3777 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3778
3779 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3780
3781 @node Trampolines
3782 @section Support for Nested Functions
3783 @cindex support for nested functions
3784 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3785 @cindex descriptors for nested functions
3786 @cindex nested functions, support for
3787
3788 Taking the address of a nested function requires special compiler
3789 handling to ensure that the static chain register is loaded when
3790 the function is invoked via an indirect call.
3791
3792 GCC has traditionally supported nested functions by creating an
3793 executable @dfn{trampoline} at run time when the address of a nested
3794 function is taken. This is a small piece of code which normally
3795 resides on the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function.
3796 The trampoline loads the static chain register and then jumps to the
3797 real address of the nested function.
3798
3799 The use of trampolines requires an executable stack, which is a
3800 security risk. To avoid this problem, GCC also supports another
3801 strategy: using descriptors for nested functions. Under this model,
3802 taking the address of a nested function results in a pointer to a
3803 non-executable function descriptor object. Initializing the static chain
3804 from the descriptor is handled at indirect call sites.
3805
3806 On some targets, including HPPA and IA-64, function descriptors may be
3807 mandated by the ABI or be otherwise handled in a target-specific way
3808 by the back end in its code generation strategy for indirect calls.
3809 GCC also provides its own generic descriptor implementation to support the
3810 @option{-fno-trampolines} option. In this case runtime detection of
3811 function descriptors at indirect call sites relies on descriptor
3812 pointers being tagged with a bit that is never set in bare function
3813 addresses. Since GCC's generic function descriptors are
3814 not ABI-compliant, this option is typically used only on a
3815 per-language basis (notably by Ada) or when it can otherwise be
3816 applied to the whole program.
3817
3818 Define the following hook if your backend either implements ABI-specified
3819 descriptor support, or can use GCC's generic descriptor implementation
3820 for nested functions.
3821
3822 @hook TARGET_CUSTOM_FUNCTION_DESCRIPTORS
3823
3824 The following macros tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and
3825 initialize an executable trampoline. You can also use this interface
3826 if your back end needs to create ABI-specified non-executable descriptors; in
3827 this case the "trampoline" created is the descriptor containing data only.
3828
3829 The instructions in an executable trampoline must do two things: load
3830 a constant address into the static chain register, and jump to the real
3831 address of the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k,
3832 this requires two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the
3833 two addresses exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands.
3834 On RISC machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a
3835 register in two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate
3836 immediate operands.
3837
3838 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3839 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3840 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3841 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3842 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3843 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3844 separately.
3845
3846 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3847
3848 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3849 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3850 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3851 @end defmac
3852
3853 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3854 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3855 @end defmac
3856
3857 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3858 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3859
3860 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3861 is used for aligning trampolines.
3862 @end defmac
3863
3864 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3865
3866 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3867
3868 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3869 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3870 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3871 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3872
3873 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3874 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3875 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3876 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3877 latter makes initialization faster.
3878
3879 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3880 the following macro.
3881
3882 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3883 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3884 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3885 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3886 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3887 @end defmac
3888
3889 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3890 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3891 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3892 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3893 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3894
3895 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3896 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3897 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3898 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3899 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3900
3901 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3902 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3903 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3904 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3905 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3906 special assembler code.
3907 @end defmac
3908
3909 @node Library Calls
3910 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3911 @cindex library subroutine names
3912 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3913
3914 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3915 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3916
3917 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
3918 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
3919 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
3920 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
3921 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
3922 @end defmac
3923
3924 @findex set_optab_libfunc
3925 @findex init_one_libfunc
3926 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
3927
3928 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
3929
3930 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
3931 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
3932 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
3933 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
3934 return a tristate.
3935
3936 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
3937 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
3938 don't need to define this macro.
3939 @end defmac
3940
3941 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
3942 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
3943 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
3944 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
3945 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
3946 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
3947 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
3948 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
3949 @end defmac
3950
3951 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
3952 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
3953 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3954 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
3955 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3956 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
3957 @end defmac
3958
3959 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
3960 @findex matherr
3961 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
3962 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
3963 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
3964 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
3965 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
3966 system.
3967
3968 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
3969 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
3970 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
3971 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
3972 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
3973 @end defmac
3974
3975 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
3976 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
3977 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
3978 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
3979 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
3980 macro, a reasonable default is used.
3981 @end defmac
3982
3983 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
3984
3985 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
3986 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
3987 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
3988 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
3989 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
3990 the NeXT runtime installed.
3991
3992 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
3993 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
3994 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
3995
3996 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
3997 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
3998 @end defmac
3999
4000 @node Addressing Modes
4001 @section Addressing Modes
4002 @cindex addressing modes
4003
4004 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4005 This is about addressing modes.
4006
4007 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4008 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4009 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4010 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4011 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4012 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4013 @end defmac
4014
4015 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4016 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4017 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4018 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4019 the size of the memory operand.
4020 @end defmac
4021
4022 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4023 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4024 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4025 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4026 @end defmac
4027
4028 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4029 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4030 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4031 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4032 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4033 constant addresses are supported.
4034 @end defmac
4035
4036 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4037 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4038 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4039 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4040 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4041 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4042 @end defmac
4043
4044 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4045 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4046 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4047 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4048 accept.
4049 @end defmac
4050
4051 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4052
4053 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4054 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4055 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4056 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4057 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4058 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4059 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4060 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4061 @code{'m'} constraint.
4062 @end defmac
4063
4064 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4065 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4066 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4067 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4068 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4069
4070 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4071 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4072
4073 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4074 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4075 @end defmac
4076
4077 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4078
4079 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4080 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4081 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4082 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4083 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4084 performance reasons.
4085
4086 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4087 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4088 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4089 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4090 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4091 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4092 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4093 be shared.
4094
4095 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4096 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4097 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4098 of reload internals.
4099
4100 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4101 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4102 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4103
4104 @findex push_reload
4105 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4106 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4107 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4108
4109 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4110 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4111 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4112 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4113 @code{push_reload}.
4114
4115 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4116 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4117 the address has become legitimate.
4118
4119 @findex copy_rtx
4120 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4121 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4122 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4123 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4124 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4125 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4126 @end defmac
4127
4128 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4129
4130 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4131
4132 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4133
4134 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4135
4136 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4137
4138 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4139
4140 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4141
4142 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4143
4144 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4145
4146 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4147
4148 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
4149
4150 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4151
4152 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST
4153
4154 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4155
4156 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4157
4158 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MD_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4159
4160 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4161
4162 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4163
4164 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SPLIT_REDUCTION
4165
4166 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4167
4168 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_GET_MASK_MODE
4169
4170 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_EMPTY_MASK_IS_EXPENSIVE
4171
4172 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4173
4174 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4175
4176 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4177
4178 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4179
4180 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4181
4182 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4183
4184 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4185
4186 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4187
4188 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4189
4190 @hook TARGET_SIMT_VF
4191
4192 @hook TARGET_GOACC_VALIDATE_DIMS
4193
4194 @hook TARGET_GOACC_DIM_LIMIT
4195
4196 @hook TARGET_GOACC_FORK_JOIN
4197
4198 @hook TARGET_GOACC_REDUCTION
4199
4200 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_ELSE_VALUE
4201
4202 @node Anchored Addresses
4203 @section Anchored Addresses
4204 @cindex anchored addresses
4205 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4206
4207 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4208 For example, if we have:
4209
4210 @smallexample
4211 static int a, b, c;
4212 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4213 @end smallexample
4214
4215 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4216 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4217 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4218 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4219 be something like:
4220
4221 @smallexample
4222 int foo (void)
4223 @{
4224 register int *xr = &x;
4225 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4226 @}
4227 @end smallexample
4228
4229 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4230 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4231
4232 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4233 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4234 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4235 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4236
4237 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4238
4239 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4240
4241 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4242
4243 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4244
4245 @node Condition Code
4246 @section Condition Code Status
4247 @cindex condition code status
4248
4249 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4250 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4251
4252 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4253 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4254 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4255 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4256 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4257 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4258 most RISC machines.
4259
4260 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4261 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4262 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4263 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4264 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4265 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4266
4267 These restrictions can prevent important
4268 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4269 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4270 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4271 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4272 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4273
4274 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4275 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4276 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4277 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4278 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4279 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4280 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4281
4282 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4283 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4284 interested in most macros in this section.
4285
4286 @menu
4287 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4288 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4289 @end menu
4290
4291 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4292 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4293 @findex cc0
4294
4295 @findex cc_status
4296 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4297 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4298 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4299 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4300 currently based, and several standard flags.
4301
4302 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4303 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4304 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4305
4306 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4307 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4308 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4309
4310 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4311 @end defmac
4312
4313 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4314 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4315 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4316 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4317 define this macro to initialize it.
4318
4319 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4320 @end defmac
4321
4322 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4323 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4324 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4325 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4326 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4327 set @code{(cc0)}.
4328
4329 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4330
4331 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4332 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4333 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4334 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4335 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4336 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4337 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4338 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4339 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4340 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4341 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4342 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4343 condition code value.
4344
4345 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4346 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4347 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4348 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4349 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4350 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4351 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4352
4353 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4354 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4355 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4356 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4357 @end defmac
4358
4359 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4360 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4361 @findex CCmode
4362 @findex MODE_CC
4363
4364 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4365 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4366 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4367 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4368 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4369 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4370 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4371 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4372 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4373 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4374 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4375
4376 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4377 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4378 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4379 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4380 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4381 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4382 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4383
4384 @smallexample
4385 (define_insn ""
4386 [(set (reg:CCNZ 0)
4387 (compare:CCNZ
4388 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4389 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4390 (const_int 0)))]
4391 ""
4392 "@dots{}")
4393 @end smallexample
4394
4395 @noindent
4396 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CCNZmode}
4397 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4398
4399 @smallexample
4400 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4401 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4402 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4403 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4404 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4405 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4406 ? CCNZmode : CCmode))
4407 @end smallexample
4408
4409 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4410 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4411 this section.
4412
4413 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4414 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4415 @end defmac
4416
4417 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4418
4419 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4420 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4421 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4422 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4423 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4424
4425 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4426 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4427 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4428 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4429
4430 @smallexample
4431 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4432 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4433 @end smallexample
4434 @end defmac
4435
4436 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4437 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4438 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4439 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4440 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4441 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4442 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4443 like:
4444
4445 @smallexample
4446 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4447 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4448 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4449 @end smallexample
4450 @end defmac
4451
4452 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4453
4454 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4455
4456 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4457
4458 @node Costs
4459 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4460 @cindex costs of instructions
4461 @cindex relative costs
4462 @cindex speed of instructions
4463
4464 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4465 on the target machine.
4466
4467 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4468 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4469 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4470 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4471 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4472 that.
4473
4474 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4475 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4476 registers if they are not general registers.
4477
4478 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4479 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4480 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4481 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4482 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4483 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4484
4485 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4486 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4487 @end defmac
4488
4489 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4490
4491 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4492 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4493 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4494 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4495 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4496 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4497 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4498
4499 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4500 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4501 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4502 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4503 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4504 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4505
4506 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4507 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4508 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4509 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4510 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4511 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4512 are the same as to this macro.
4513
4514 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4515 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4516 @end defmac
4517
4518 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4519
4520 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4521 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4522 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4523 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4524 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4525 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4526 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4527 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4528 @end defmac
4529
4530 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4531 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4532 ordinarily expect.
4533
4534 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4535 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4536 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4537 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4538 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4539 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4540
4541 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4542 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4543 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4544 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4545 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4546 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4547 @end defmac
4548
4549 @hook TARGET_SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4550
4551 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4552 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4553 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4554 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4555 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4556
4557 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4558 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4559 the number of such sequences.
4560
4561 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4562 optimized for speed rather than size.
4563
4564 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4565 @end defmac
4566
4567 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4568
4569 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_BY_PIECES_BRANCH_RATIO
4570
4571 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4572 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4573 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4574 @end defmac
4575
4576 @defmac STORE_MAX_PIECES
4577 A C expression used by @code{store_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4578 a store used to memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}, or two times
4579 the size of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, whichever is smaller.
4580 @end defmac
4581
4582 @defmac COMPARE_MAX_PIECES
4583 A C expression used by @code{compare_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4584 a load or store used to compare memory is. Defaults to
4585 @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}.
4586 @end defmac
4587
4588 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4589 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4590 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4591 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4592 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4593
4594 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4595 optimized for speed rather than size.
4596
4597 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4598 @end defmac
4599
4600 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4601 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4602 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4603 a block set insn or a library call.
4604 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4605 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4606
4607 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4608 optimized for speed rather than size.
4609
4610 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4611 @end defmac
4612
4613 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4614 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4615 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4616 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4617 @end defmac
4618
4619 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4620 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4621 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4622 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4623 @end defmac
4624
4625 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4626 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4627 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4628 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4629 @end defmac
4630
4631 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4632 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4633 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4634 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4635 @end defmac
4636
4637 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4638 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4639 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4640 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4641 @end defmac
4642
4643 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4644 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4645 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4646 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4647 @end defmac
4648
4649 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4650 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4651 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4652 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4653 @end defmac
4654
4655 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4656 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4657 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4658 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4659 @end defmac
4660
4661 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4662 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4663 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4664 @end defmac
4665
4666 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4667 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4668 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4669 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4670 @end defmac
4671
4672 @hook TARGET_OPTAB_SUPPORTED_P
4673
4674 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4675
4676 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4677
4678 @hook TARGET_INSN_COST
4679
4680 @hook TARGET_MAX_NOCE_IFCVT_SEQ_COST
4681
4682 @hook TARGET_NOCE_CONVERSION_PROFITABLE_P
4683
4684 @hook TARGET_NO_SPECULATION_IN_DELAY_SLOTS_P
4685
4686 @hook TARGET_ESTIMATED_POLY_VALUE
4687
4688 @node Scheduling
4689 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4690
4691 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4692 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4693 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4694 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4695
4696 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4697
4698 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4699
4700 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4701
4702 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4703
4704 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4705
4706 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4707
4708 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4709
4710 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4711
4712 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4713
4714 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4715
4716 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4717
4718 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4719
4720 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4721
4722 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4723
4724 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4725
4726 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4727
4728 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4729
4730 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4731
4732 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4733
4734 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4735
4736 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4737
4738 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4739
4740 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4741
4742 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4743
4744 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4745
4746 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4747
4748 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4749
4750 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4751
4752 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4753
4754 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4755
4756 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4757
4758 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4759
4760 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4761
4762 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4763
4764 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4765
4766 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4767
4768 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4769
4770 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4771
4772 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4773
4774 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CAN_SPECULATE_INSN
4775
4776 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4777
4778 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4779
4780 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4781
4782 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4783
4784 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4785
4786 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4787
4788 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_DIVMOD_LIBFUNC
4789
4790 @node Sections
4791 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4792 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4793 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4794
4795 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4796 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4797 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4798 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4799 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4800 of sections.
4801
4802 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4803 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4804 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4805 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4806 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4807 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4808 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4809
4810 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4811 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4812 to be string literals.
4813
4814 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4815 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4816 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4817 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4818
4819 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4820 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4821 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4822 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4823 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4824 reuse @code{text_section}.
4825
4826 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4827 if the target does not provide them.
4828
4829 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4830 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4831 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4832 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4833 @end defmac
4834
4835 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4836 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4837 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4838 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4839 @end defmac
4840
4841 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4842 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4843 executed functions in the program.
4844 @end defmac
4845
4846 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4847 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4848 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4849 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4850 @end defmac
4851
4852 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4853 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4854 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4855 initialized, writable small data.
4856 @end defmac
4857
4858 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4859 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4860 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4861 data.
4862 @end defmac
4863
4864 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4865 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4866 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4867 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4868 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4869 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4870 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4871 used.
4872 @end defmac
4873
4874 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4875 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4876 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4877 uninitialized, writable small data.
4878 @end defmac
4879
4880 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4881 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4882 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4883 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4884 @end defmac
4885
4886 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4887 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4888 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4889 default is @code{'T'}.
4890 @end defmac
4891
4892 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4893 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4894 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4895 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4896 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4897 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4898 @end defmac
4899
4900 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4901 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4902 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4903 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4904 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4905 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4906 @end defmac
4907
4908 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4909 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4910 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4911 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4912 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4913 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4914 @end defmac
4915
4916 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4917 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4918 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4919 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4920 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4921 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4922 @end defmac
4923
4924 @defmac MACH_DEP_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4925 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4926 containing the flag used to mark a machine-dependent section. This
4927 corresponds to the @code{SECTION_MACH_DEP} section flag.
4928 @end defmac
4929
4930 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4931 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4932 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4933 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4934 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4935 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4936 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4937 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4938 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
4939 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
4940 @end defmac
4941
4942 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
4943 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
4944 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
4945 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
4946 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
4947 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
4948 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
4949 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
4950 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
4951 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
4952 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
4953 @end defmac
4954
4955 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
4956 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
4957 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
4958 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
4959 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
4960 @end defmac
4961
4962 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4963 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
4964 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4965 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4966 readonly data section is used.
4967
4968 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4969 @end defmac
4970
4971 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
4972
4973 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
4974
4975 @hook TARGET_ASM_GENERATE_PIC_ADDR_DIFF_VEC
4976
4977 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
4978
4979 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
4980 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
4981 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
4982
4983 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
4984 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
4985 it is unlikely to be called.
4986 @end defmac
4987
4988 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
4989
4990 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
4991
4992 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
4993
4994 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
4995
4996 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
4997
4998 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
4999
5000 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5001
5002 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5003
5004 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5005
5006 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5007
5008 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5009
5010 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5011
5012 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5013
5014
5015 @node PIC
5016 @section Position Independent Code
5017 @cindex position independent code
5018 @cindex PIC
5019
5020 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5021 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5022 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5023 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5024 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5025 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5026 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5027 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5028 relative addresses.
5029 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5030 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5031
5032 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5033 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5034 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5035 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5036 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5037 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5038 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5039 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5040 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5041 @end defmac
5042
5043 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5044 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5045 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5046 the default is zero. Do not define
5047 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5048 @end defmac
5049
5050 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5051 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5052 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5053 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5054 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5055 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5056 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5057 position independent code.
5058 @end defmac
5059
5060 @node Assembler Format
5061 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5062
5063 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5064 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5065 instructions do.
5066
5067 @menu
5068 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5069 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5070 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5071 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5072 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5073 and termination routines.
5074 * Macros for Initialization::
5075 Specific macros that control the handling of
5076 initialization and termination routines.
5077 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5078 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5079 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5080 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5081 @end menu
5082
5083 @node File Framework
5084 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5085 @cindex assembler format
5086 @cindex output of assembler code
5087
5088 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5089 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5090
5091 @findex default_file_start
5092 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5093
5094 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5095
5096 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5097
5098 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5099
5100 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5101 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5102 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5103 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5104 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5105 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5106 this function.
5107 @end deftypefun
5108
5109 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5110
5111 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5112
5113 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5114
5115 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5116 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5117 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5118 the end of the line.
5119 @end defmac
5120
5121 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5122 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5123 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5124 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5125 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5126 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5127 @end defmac
5128
5129 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5130 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5131 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5132 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5133 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5134 @end defmac
5135
5136 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5137 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5138 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5139 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5140
5141 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5142 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5143 @end defmac
5144
5145 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5146
5147 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5148
5149 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5150 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5151 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5152 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5153 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5154 of the filename using this macro.
5155 @end defmac
5156
5157 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5158
5159 @hook TARGET_ASM_ELF_FLAGS_NUMERIC
5160
5161 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5162
5163 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5164
5165 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5166 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5167 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5168 @end deftypevr
5169
5170 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5171 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5172
5173 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5174
5175 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5176
5177 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5178
5179 @need 2000
5180 @node Data Output
5181 @subsection Output of Data
5182
5183
5184 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5185
5186 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5187
5188 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5189
5190 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5191
5192 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5193 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5194 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5195 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5196 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5197
5198 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5199 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5200 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5201 @end defmac
5202
5203 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5204 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5205 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5206 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5207 @end defmac
5208
5209 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5210 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5211 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5212 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5213 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5214 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5215 pool before the function.
5216 @end defmac
5217
5218 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5219 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5220 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5221 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5222 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5223 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5224 immediately after this call.
5225
5226 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5227 not be defined.
5228 @end defmac
5229
5230 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5231 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5232 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5233 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5234
5235 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5236 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5237 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5238 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5239 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5240 alignment.
5241
5242 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5243 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5244 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5245 Here is how to do this:
5246
5247 @smallexample
5248 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5249 @end smallexample
5250
5251 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5252 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5253 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5254
5255 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5256 @end defmac
5257
5258 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5259 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5260 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5261 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5262 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5263 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5264
5265 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5266 define this macro.
5267 @end defmac
5268
5269 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5270 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5271 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5272 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5273 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5274
5275 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5276 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5277 @end defmac
5278
5279 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5280
5281 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5282 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5283
5284 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5285 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5286 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5287 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5288 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5289 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5290 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5291 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5292 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5293 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5294 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5295 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5296 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5297 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5298 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5299 on the host machine.
5300
5301 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5302 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5303 machine's memory.
5304 @end defmac
5305
5306 @node Uninitialized Data
5307 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5308
5309 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5310 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5311
5312 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5313 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5314 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5315 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5316 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5317 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5318 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5319 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5320 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5321 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5322 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5323 an ordinary undefined external.
5324
5325 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5326 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5327 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5328
5329 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5330 common global variables are output.
5331 @end defmac
5332
5333 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5334 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5335 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5336 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5337 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5338 as the number of bits.
5339 @end defmac
5340
5341 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5342 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5343 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5344 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5345 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5346 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5347 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5348 @end defmac
5349
5350 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5351 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5352 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5353 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5354 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5355
5356 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5357 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5358 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5359 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5360 the name, and a newline.
5361
5362 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5363 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5364 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5365 You do not need to do both.
5366
5367 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5368 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5369 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5370 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5371 common in order to save space in the object file.
5372 @end defmac
5373
5374 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5375 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5376 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5377 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5378 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5379
5380 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5381 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5382 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5383
5384 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5385 static variables are output.
5386 @end defmac
5387
5388 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5389 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5390 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5391 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5392 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5393 as the number of bits.
5394 @end defmac
5395
5396 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5397 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5398 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5399 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5400 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5401 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5402 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5403 @end defmac
5404
5405 @node Label Output
5406 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5407
5408 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5409 This is about outputting labels.
5410
5411 @findex assemble_name
5412 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5413 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5414 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5415 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5416 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5417 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5418 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5419 @end defmac
5420
5421 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5422 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5423 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5424 a function.
5425 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5426 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5427 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5428 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5429
5430 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5431 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5432 @end defmac
5433
5434 @findex assemble_name_raw
5435 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5436 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5437 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5438 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5439 that it is more efficient.
5440 @end defmac
5441
5442 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5443 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5444 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5445 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5446 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5447
5448 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5449 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5450 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5451 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5452 define this macro.
5453 @end defmac
5454
5455 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5456 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5457 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5458 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5459 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5460 provided.
5461 @end defmac
5462
5463 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5464 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5465 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5466 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5467 address.
5468
5469 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5470 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5471 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5472 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5473 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5474 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5475 @end defmac
5476
5477 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5478 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5479 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5480 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5481 @samp{.} is used instead.
5482 @end defmac
5483
5484 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5485 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5486 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5487 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5488 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5489 @end defmac
5490
5491 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5492 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5493 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5494 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5495 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5496
5497 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5498 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5499 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5500 types at all, do not define this macro.
5501 @end defmac
5502
5503 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5504 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5505 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5506 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5507 the default is not to define this macro.
5508
5509 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5510 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5511 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5512 types at all, do not define this macro.
5513 @end defmac
5514
5515 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5516 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5517 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5518 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5519 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5520 you should not count on this.
5521
5522 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5523 definition of this macro is provided.
5524 @end defmac
5525
5526 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5527 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5528 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5529 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5530 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5531 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5532 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5533
5534 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5535 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5536
5537 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5538 of this macro.
5539 @end defmac
5540
5541 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5542 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5543 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5544 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5545 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5546 representing the function.
5547
5548 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5549
5550 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5551 of this macro.
5552 @end defmac
5553
5554 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5555 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5556 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5557 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5558 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5559 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5560 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5561
5562 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5563 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5564
5565 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5566 of this macro.
5567 @end defmac
5568
5569 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5570 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5571 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5572 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5573 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5574 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5575
5576 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5577
5578 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5579 of this macro.
5580 @end defmac
5581
5582 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5583 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5584 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5585 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5586 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5587 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5588
5589 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5590 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5591
5592 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5593 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5594 @end defmac
5595
5596 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5597
5598 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5599 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5600 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5601 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5602
5603 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5604 nothing.
5605 @end defmac
5606
5607 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5608 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5609 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5610 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5611 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5612 something about the size of the object.
5613
5614 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5615 nothing.
5616
5617 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5618 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5619 @end defmac
5620
5621 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5622
5623 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5624
5625 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5626
5627 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5628 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5629 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5630 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5631 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5632 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5633 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5634 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5635
5636 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5637 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5638 macro.
5639 @end defmac
5640
5641 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5642 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5643 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5644 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5645 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5646 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5647 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5648 to make @var{name} weak.
5649 @end defmac
5650
5651 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5652 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5653 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5654 declaration of @code{name}.
5655 @end defmac
5656
5657 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5658 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5659 supports weak symbols.
5660
5661 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5662 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5663 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5664 @end defmac
5665
5666 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5667 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5668
5669 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5670 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5671 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5672 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5673 @end defmac
5674
5675 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5676 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5677 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5678 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5679 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5680 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5681 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5682 @end defmac
5683
5684 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5685 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5686 semantics.
5687
5688 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5689 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5690 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5691 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5692 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5693 be emitted as one-only.
5694 @end defmac
5695
5696 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5697
5698 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5699 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5700 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5701 The default is @code{0}.
5702
5703 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5704 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5705 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5706 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5707 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5708 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5709 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5710
5711 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5712 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5713 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5714 table of contents.
5715 @end defmac
5716
5717 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5718 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5719 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5720 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5721 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5722 declaration.
5723
5724 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5725 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5726 @end defmac
5727
5728 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5729
5730 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5731
5732 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5733 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5734 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5735 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5736 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5737 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5738 @end defmac
5739
5740 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5741
5742 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5743 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5744 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5745 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5746 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5747 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5748 @end defmac
5749
5750 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5751 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5752 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5753 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5754 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5755 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5756 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5757 being taken.
5758 @end defmac
5759
5760 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5761
5762 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5763 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5764 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5765 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5766 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5767 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5768 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5769 bundles.
5770
5771 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5772 used.
5773 @end defmac
5774
5775 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5776 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5777 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5778
5779 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5780 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5781 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5782
5783 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5784 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5785 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5786 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5787 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5788 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5789 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5790 @end defmac
5791
5792 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5793 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5794 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5795 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5796 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5797
5798 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5799 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5800 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5801 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5802 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5803 internal static variables in different scopes.
5804
5805 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5806 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5807 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5808 between the name and the number will suffice.
5809
5810 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5811 which is correct for most systems.
5812 @end defmac
5813
5814 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5815 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5816 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5817
5818 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5819 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5820 correct for most systems.
5821 @end defmac
5822
5823 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5824 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5825 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5826 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5827 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5828 the tree nodes are available.
5829
5830 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5831 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5832 correct for most systems.
5833 @end defmac
5834
5835 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5836 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5837 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5838 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5839 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5840 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5841 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5842 @end defmac
5843
5844 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5845 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5846 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5847 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5848 an undefined weak symbol.
5849
5850 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5851 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5852 @end defmac
5853
5854 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5855 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5856 Objective-C methods.
5857
5858 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5859 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5860 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5861 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5862
5863 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5864 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5865 systems define other ways of computing names.
5866
5867 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5868 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5869 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5870 50 characters extra.
5871
5872 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5873 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5874 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5875 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5876
5877 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5878 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5879 @end defmac
5880
5881 @node Initialization
5882 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5883 @cindex initialization routines
5884 @cindex termination routines
5885 @cindex constructors, output of
5886 @cindex destructors, output of
5887
5888 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5889 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5890 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5891 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5892 @code{main} is called.
5893
5894 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5895 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5896 terminates.
5897
5898 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5899 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5900 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5901 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5902
5903 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5904 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5905 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5906
5907 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5908 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5909 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5910 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5911 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5912
5913 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5914 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5915 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5916 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5917 pointer containing zero.
5918
5919 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5920 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5921 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5922 list; destructors in forward order.
5923
5924 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5925 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5926 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5927 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5928 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5929 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5930 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5931 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5932
5933 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5934 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5935 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5936 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5937 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5938
5939 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5940 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5941 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5942 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5943 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
5944
5945 @smallexample
5946 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
5947 @end smallexample
5948
5949 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
5950 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
5951 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
5952 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
5953 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
5954
5955 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
5956 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
5957 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
5958 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
5959 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
5960 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
5961
5962 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5963 macro properly.
5964
5965 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
5966 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
5967 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
5968 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5969 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
5970 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
5971
5972 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5973 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5974 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5975 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5976 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5977 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5978 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5979 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5980 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5981 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5982 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5983 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5984 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5985 the initialization process.
5986
5987 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5988 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5989 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
5990 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
5991 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
5992 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
5993 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
5994 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
5995 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
5996 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
5997 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
5998
5999 @ifinfo
6000 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6001 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6002 @end ifinfo
6003
6004 @node Macros for Initialization
6005 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6006
6007 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6008 and termination functions:
6009
6010 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6011 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6012 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6013 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6014 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6015 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6016 run the initialization functions.
6017 @end defmac
6018
6019 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6020 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6021 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6022 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6023 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6024 @end defmac
6025
6026 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6027 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6028 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6029 @end defmac
6030
6031 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6032 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6033 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6034 @end defmac
6035
6036 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6037 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6038 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6039 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6040 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6041 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6042
6043 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6044 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6045 exception tables embedded in the code.
6046 @end defmac
6047
6048 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6049 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6050 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6051 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6052 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6053 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6054 @end defmac
6055
6056 @defmac INVOKE__main
6057 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6058 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6059 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6060 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6061 @end defmac
6062
6063 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6064 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6065 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6066 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6067 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6068 @end defmac
6069
6070 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6071
6072 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6073
6074 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6075
6076 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6077 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6078
6079 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6080 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6081 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6082
6083 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6084 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6085
6086 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6087 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6088 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6089 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6090
6091 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6092 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6093 @end defmac
6094
6095 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6096 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6097 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6098 @command{nm}.
6099 @end defmac
6100
6101 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6102 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6103 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6104 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6105 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6106 produces.
6107 @end defmac
6108
6109 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6110 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6111 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6112 termination functions in shared libraries:
6113
6114 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6115 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6116 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6117 @end defmac
6118
6119 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6120 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6121 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6122 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6123 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6124 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6125 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6126 @end defmac
6127
6128 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6129 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6130 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6131 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6132 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6133 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6134 @end defmac
6135
6136 @node Instruction Output
6137 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6138
6139 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6140 This describes assembler instruction output.
6141
6142 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6143 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6144 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6145 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6146 @end defmac
6147
6148 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6149 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6150 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6151 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6152 to registers using alternate names.
6153 @end defmac
6154
6155 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6156 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6157 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6158 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6159 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6160 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6161 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6162 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6163
6164 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6165 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6166 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6167 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6168 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6169 @end defmac
6170
6171 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6172 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6173 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6174
6175 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6176 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6177 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6178 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6179 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6180 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6181 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6182 so that it will not be output twice.
6183
6184 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6185 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6186 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6187 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6188 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6189
6190 @findex recog_data.operand
6191 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6192 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6193
6194 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6195 in the usual way.
6196 @end defmac
6197
6198 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6199 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6200 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6201 they will be output differently.
6202
6203 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6204 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6205 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6206 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6207 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6208 by changing the contents of the vector.
6209
6210 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6211 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6212 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6213 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6214 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6215 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6216
6217 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6218 @end defmac
6219
6220 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6221
6222 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6223 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6224 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6225 RTL expression.
6226
6227 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6228 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6229 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6230 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6231 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6232 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6233 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6234
6235 @findex reg_names
6236 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6237 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6238 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6239 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6240
6241 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6242 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6243 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6244 @var{code}.
6245 @end defmac
6246
6247 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6248 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6249 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6250 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6251 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6252 in this way.
6253 @end defmac
6254
6255 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6256 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6257 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6258 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6259
6260 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6261 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6262 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6263 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6264 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6265 Format}.
6266 @end defmac
6267
6268 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6269 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6270 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6271 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6272 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6273 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6274 or whatever.
6275
6276 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6277 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6278 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6279 @end defmac
6280
6281 @findex final_sequence
6282 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6283 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6284 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6285 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6286 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6287 being output.
6288
6289 @findex asm_fprintf
6290 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6291 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6292 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6293 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6294 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6295 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6296 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6297 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6298 files can define these macros differently.
6299 @end defmac
6300
6301 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6302 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6303 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6304 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6305 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6306 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6307 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6308 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6309 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6310 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6311 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6312 @end defmac
6313
6314 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6315 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6316 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6317 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6318 first variant.
6319
6320 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6321 @smallexample
6322 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6323 @end smallexample
6324 @noindent
6325 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6326 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6327 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6328 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6329 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6330 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6331 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6332 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6333 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6334
6335 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6336 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6337 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6338
6339 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6340 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6341 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6342 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6343 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6344 opcodes or operand order.
6345 @end defmac
6346
6347 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6348 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6349 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6350 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6351 profiling.
6352 @end defmac
6353
6354 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6355 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6356 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6357 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6358 profiling.
6359 @end defmac
6360
6361 @node Dispatch Tables
6362 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6363
6364 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6365 This concerns dispatch tables.
6366
6367 @cindex dispatch table
6368 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6369 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6370 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6371 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6372 definitions of these labels are output using
6373 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6374 way here. For example,
6375
6376 @smallexample
6377 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6378 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6379 @end smallexample
6380
6381 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6382 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6383 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6384 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6385 mode and flags can be read.
6386 @end defmac
6387
6388 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6389 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6390 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6391
6392 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6393 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6394 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6395 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6396 For example,
6397
6398 @smallexample
6399 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6400 @end smallexample
6401 @end defmac
6402
6403 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6404 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6405 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6406 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6407 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6408 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6409
6410 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6411 for the table.
6412
6413 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6414 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6415 @end defmac
6416
6417 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6418 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6419 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6420 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6421 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6422 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6423 of the preceding label.
6424
6425 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6426 the jump-table.
6427 @end defmac
6428
6429 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6430
6431 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6432
6433 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6434
6435 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6436
6437 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6438
6439 @node Exception Region Output
6440 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6441
6442 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6443
6444 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6445 region.
6446
6447 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6448 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6449 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6450 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6451 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6452
6453 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6454 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6455 @end defmac
6456
6457 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6458 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6459 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6460 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6461
6462 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6463 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6464 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6465 be marked as not to be collected.
6466 @end defmac
6467
6468 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6469 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6470 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6471 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6472 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6473 @end defmac
6474
6475 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6476 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6477 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6478 @end defmac
6479
6480 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6481 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6482 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6483 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6484 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6485 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6486 @end defmac
6487
6488 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6489 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6490 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6491 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6492 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6493 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6494 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6495
6496 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6497 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6498 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6499
6500 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6501 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6502 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6503 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6504 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6505 depending on this setting.
6506
6507 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6508 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6509 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6510 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6511 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6512 @end deftypefn
6513
6514 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6515 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6516 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6517 command-line option processing.
6518 @end deftypevr
6519
6520 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6521 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6522 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6523 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6524 @end defmac
6525
6526 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6527 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6528 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6529 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6530 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6531 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6532 @end defmac
6533
6534 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6535 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6536 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6537 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6538 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6539 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{DWARF}. Only applicable if
6540 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6541 @end defmac
6542
6543 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6544
6545 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6546
6547 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6548
6549 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6550
6551 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6552
6553 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6554
6555 @node Alignment Output
6556 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6557
6558 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6559 This describes commands for alignment.
6560
6561 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6562 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6563 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6564
6565 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6566 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6567 define the macro.
6568
6569 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6570 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6571 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6572 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6573 @end defmac
6574
6575 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6576 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6577 a @code{BARRIER}.
6578
6579 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6580 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6581 define the macro.
6582 @end defmac
6583
6584 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6585 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6586 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6587
6588 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6589 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6590 define the macro.
6591
6592 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6593 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6594 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6595 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6596 @end defmac
6597
6598 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6599 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6600 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6601 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6602
6603 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6604 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6605 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6606 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6607 @end defmac
6608
6609 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6610 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6611 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6612 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6613 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6614 @end defmac
6615
6616 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6617 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6618 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6619 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6620 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6621 section.
6622 @end defmac
6623
6624 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6625 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6626 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6627 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6628 @end defmac
6629
6630 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6631 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6632 for padding, if necessary.
6633 @end defmac
6634
6635 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6636 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6637 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6638 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6639 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6640 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6641 @end defmac
6642
6643 @need 3000
6644 @node Debugging Info
6645 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6646
6647 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6648 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6649
6650 @menu
6651 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6652 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6653 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6654 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6655 * DWARF:: Macros for DWARF format.
6656 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6657 @end menu
6658
6659 @node All Debuggers
6660 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6661
6662 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6663 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6664
6665 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6666 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6667 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6668 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6669 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6670 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6671 compiler and another for DBX@.
6672
6673 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6674 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6675 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6676 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6677 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6678
6679 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6680 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6681 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6682 @end defmac
6683
6684 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6685 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6686 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6687 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6688 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6689 that produce debugging output for DBX and allow the frame-pointer to be
6690 eliminated when the @option{-g} option is used.
6691 @end defmac
6692
6693 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6694 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6695 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6696 @var{offset}.
6697 @end defmac
6698
6699 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6700 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6701 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6702 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6703 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6704 @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG},
6705 and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6706
6707 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6708 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6709 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6710 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6711 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6712
6713 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6714 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6715 @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6716 @end defmac
6717
6718 @node DBX Options
6719 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6720
6721 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6722 These are specific options for DBX output.
6723
6724 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6725 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6726 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6727 @end defmac
6728
6729 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6730 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6731 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6732 @end defmac
6733
6734 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6735 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6736 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6737 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6738 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6739 if there is any occasion to.
6740 @end defmac
6741
6742 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6743 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6744 in the text section.
6745 @end defmac
6746
6747 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6748 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6749 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6750 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6751 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6752 @end defmac
6753
6754 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6755 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6756 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6757 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6758 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6759 information format.
6760 @end defmac
6761
6762 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6763 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6764 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6765 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6766 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6767 @end defmac
6768
6769 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6770 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6771 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6772 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6773 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6774 @end defmac
6775
6776 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6777 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6778 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6779 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6780 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6781 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6782 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6783 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6784 @end defmac
6785
6786 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6787 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6788 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6789 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6790 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6791 if backslash is correct for your system.
6792 @end defmac
6793
6794 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6795 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6796 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6797 variable.
6798 @end defmac
6799
6800 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6801 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6802 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6803 @end defmac
6804
6805 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6806 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6807 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6808 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6809 @end defmac
6810
6811 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6812 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6813 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6814 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6815 @end defmac
6816
6817 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6818 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6819 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6820 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6821 @end defmac
6822
6823 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6824 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6825 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6826 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6827 code.
6828 @end defmac
6829
6830 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6831 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6832 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6833 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6834 an absolute address.
6835 @end defmac
6836
6837 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6838 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6839 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6840 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6841 @end defmac
6842
6843 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6844 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6845 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6846 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6847 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6848 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6849 number for a type number.
6850 @end defmac
6851
6852 @node DBX Hooks
6853 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6854
6855 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6856 These are hooks for DBX format.
6857
6858 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6859 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6860 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6861 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6862 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6863 unique labels in the assembly output.
6864
6865 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6866 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6867 @end defmac
6868
6869 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6870 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6871 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6872 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6873 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6874 @end defmac
6875
6876 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6877 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6878 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6879 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6880 @end defmac
6881
6882 @node File Names and DBX
6883 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6884
6885 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6886 This describes file names in DBX format.
6887
6888 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6889 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6890 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6891 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6892 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6893
6894 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6895 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6896
6897 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6898 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6899 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6900 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6901 @end defmac
6902
6903 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6904 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6905 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6906 the beginning of the file.
6907 @end defmac
6908
6909 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6910 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6911 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6912 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6913 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6914 @end defmac
6915
6916 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6917 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6918 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6919 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6920
6921 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6922 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6923 @end defmac
6924
6925 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6926 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6927 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6928 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6929 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
6930 @end defmac
6931
6932 @need 2000
6933 @node DWARF
6934 @subsection Macros for DWARF Output
6935
6936 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6937 Here are macros for DWARF output.
6938
6939 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6940 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6941 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
6942
6943 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
6944
6945 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6946 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6947 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6948 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6949 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6950 @end defmac
6951
6952 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6953 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6954 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
6955 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
6956 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
6957 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6958 @end defmac
6959
6960 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
6961
6962 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6963 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6964 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6965 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6966 @end defmac
6967
6968 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_VIEW_DEBUG_INFO
6969 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler supports view
6970 assignment and verification in @code{.loc}. If it does not, but the
6971 user enables location views, the compiler may have to fallback to
6972 internal line number tables.
6973 @end defmac
6974
6975 @hook TARGET_RESET_LOCATION_VIEW
6976
6977 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
6978
6979 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
6980
6981 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
6982
6983 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
6984
6985 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6986 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6987 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6988 @end defmac
6989
6990 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6991 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6992 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
6993 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
6994 @end defmac
6995
6996 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{offset}, @var{section})
6997 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
6998 section-relative reference to the given @var{label} plus @var{offset}, using
6999 an integer of the given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the
7000 given @var{section}.
7001 @end defmac
7002
7003 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7004 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
7005 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7006 @end defmac
7007
7008 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7009 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
7010 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7011 @end defmac
7012
7013 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
7014 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
7015 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
7016 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
7017 is referenced by a function.
7018 @end defmac
7019
7020 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
7021
7022 @need 2000
7023 @node VMS Debug
7024 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7025
7026 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7027 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7028
7029 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7030 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7031 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7032 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7033 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7034 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7035 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7036 @end defmac
7037
7038 @node Floating Point
7039 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7040 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7041 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7042
7043 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7044 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7045 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7046 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7047 doing the compilation.
7048
7049 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7050 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7051 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7052 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7053 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7054 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7055 target floating point formats are identical.
7056
7057 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7058 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7059 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7060 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7061
7062 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7063 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7064 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7065 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7066 quantity.
7067 @end defmac
7068
7069 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7070 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7071 @end deftypefn
7072
7073 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7074 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7075 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7076 @end deftypefn
7077
7078 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7079 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7080 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7081 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7082 defined by the C language for both.
7083 @end deftypefn
7084
7085 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7086 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7087 @end deftypefn
7088
7089 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7090 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7091 @end deftypefn
7092
7093 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7094 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7095 @end deftypefn
7096
7097 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7098 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7099 @end deftypefn
7100
7101 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7102 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7103 @end deftypefn
7104
7105 @node Mode Switching
7106 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7107 @cindex mode switching
7108 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7109
7110 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7111 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7112 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7113
7114 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7115 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7116 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7117 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7118 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7119 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you cannot put this into instruction emitting
7120 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7121
7122 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7123 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7124 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7125 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7126 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7127 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7128 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7129 are optional.
7130 @end defmac
7131
7132 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7133 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7134 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7135 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7136 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7137 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7138 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7139 entity in question.
7140 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7141 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7142 switch is needed / supplied.
7143 @end defmac
7144
7145 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7146
7147 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7148
7149 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7150
7151 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7152
7153 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7154
7155 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7156
7157 @node Target Attributes
7158 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7159 @cindex target attributes
7160 @cindex machine attributes
7161 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7162
7163 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7164 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7165 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7166
7167 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7168
7169 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7170
7171 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7172
7173 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7174
7175 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7176
7177 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7178
7179 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7180
7181 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7182 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7183 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7184 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7185 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7186 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7187 on this implementation detail.
7188 @end defmac
7189
7190 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7191
7192 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7193
7194 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7195
7196 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7197
7198 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7199
7200 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7201
7202 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7203
7204 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7205
7206 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7207
7208 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7209
7210 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7211
7212 @hook TARGET_RELAYOUT_FUNCTION
7213
7214 @node Emulated TLS
7215 @section Emulating TLS
7216 @cindex Emulated TLS
7217
7218 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7219 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7220 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7221 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7222 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7223 layer.
7224
7225 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7226 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7227 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7228 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7229
7230 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7231
7232 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7233
7234 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7235
7236 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7237
7238 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7239
7240 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7241
7242 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7243
7244 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7245
7246 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7247
7248 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7249
7250 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7251 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7252 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7253
7254 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7255 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7256 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7257 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7258
7259 @smallexample
7260 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7261 unsigned int d;
7262
7263 d = cp0count + 3;
7264 @end smallexample
7265
7266 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7267 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7268 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7269
7270 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7271 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7272 later in the function.
7273
7274 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7275 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7276 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7277
7278 @node PCH Target
7279 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7280 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7281
7282 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7283
7284 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7285
7286 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7287
7288 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7289
7290 @node C++ ABI
7291 @section C++ ABI parameters
7292 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7293
7294 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7295
7296 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7297
7298 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7299
7300 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7301
7302 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7303
7304 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7305
7306 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7307
7308 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7309
7310 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7311
7312 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7313
7314 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7315
7316 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7317
7318 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7319
7320 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7321
7322 @node D Language and ABI
7323 @section D ABI parameters
7324 @cindex parameters, d abi
7325
7326 @hook TARGET_D_CPU_VERSIONS
7327
7328 @hook TARGET_D_OS_VERSIONS
7329
7330 @hook TARGET_D_CRITSEC_SIZE
7331
7332 @node Named Address Spaces
7333 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7334 @cindex named address spaces
7335
7336 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7337 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7338 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7339 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7340 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7341 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7342 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7343 @code{const} type attributes.
7344
7345 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7346 pointers to the generic address space.
7347
7348 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7349 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7350 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7351 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7352 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7353 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7354 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7355 always 32 bits).
7356
7357 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7358 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7359 address space.
7360
7361 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7362 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7363 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7364 named address space #1:
7365 @smallexample
7366 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7367 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7368 @end smallexample
7369
7370 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7371
7372 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7373
7374 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7375
7376 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7377
7378 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7379
7380 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7381
7382 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ZERO_ADDRESS_VALID
7383
7384 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7385
7386 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DEBUG
7387
7388 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DIAGNOSE_USAGE
7389
7390 @node Misc
7391 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7392 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7393
7394 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7395 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7396
7397 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7398 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7399 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7400 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7401 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7402 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7403 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7404 @end defmac
7405
7406 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7407 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7408 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7409 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7410 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7411 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7412 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7413 @end defmac
7414
7415 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7416 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7417 elements of a jump-table should have.
7418 @end defmac
7419
7420 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7421 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7422 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7423 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7424 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7425 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7426 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7427 flags can be updated.
7428 @end defmac
7429
7430 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7431 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7432 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7433 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7434 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7435 is in effect.
7436 @end defmac
7437
7438 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7439
7440 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7441 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7442 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register. To be
7443 more explicit, if you start with a pair of @code{word_mode} registers with
7444 known values and you do a subword, for example @code{QImode}, addition on
7445 the low part of the registers, then the compiler may consider that the
7446 result has a known value in @code{word_mode} too if the macro is defined
7447 to 1. Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7448 @end defmac
7449
7450 @hook TARGET_MIN_ARITHMETIC_PRECISION
7451
7452 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7453 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7454 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7455 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7456 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7457 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7458 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7459 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7460
7461 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7462 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7463 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7464 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7465 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7466
7467 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7468 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7469 of these hard registers @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns false
7470 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7471 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7472
7473 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7474 mode, @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7475 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7476 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7477 @end defmac
7478
7479 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7480 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7481 extends.
7482 @end defmac
7483
7484 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7485
7486 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7487 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7488 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7489 @end defmac
7490
7491 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7492 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7493 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7494 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7495 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7496 at run-time.
7497 @end defmac
7498
7499 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7500 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7501 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7502 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7503 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7504 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7505 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7506 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7507 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7508 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7509 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7510
7511 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7512 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7513 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7514
7515 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7516 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7517 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7518 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7519 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7520
7521 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7522 @end defmac
7523
7524 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7525 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7526
7527 @hook TARGET_TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7528
7529 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7530
7531 @hook TARGET_SETJMP_PRESERVES_NONVOLATILE_REGS_P
7532
7533 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7534 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7535 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7536 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7537 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7538 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7539
7540 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7541 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7542 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7543 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7544 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7545 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7546 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7547 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7548 the compiler.
7549
7550 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7551 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7552 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7553 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7554 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7555 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7556 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7557 expression
7558
7559 @smallexample
7560 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7561 @end smallexample
7562
7563 @noindent
7564 can be converted to
7565
7566 @smallexample
7567 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7568 @end smallexample
7569
7570 @noindent
7571 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7572 tested into the sign bit.
7573
7574 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7575 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7576 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7577 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7578 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7579 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7580
7581 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7582 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7583 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7584 to be used:
7585
7586 @itemize @bullet
7587 @item
7588 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7589 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7590 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7591 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7592 combine the normalization with other operations.
7593
7594 @item
7595 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7596 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7597 other machines.
7598
7599 @item
7600 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7601 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7602 others.
7603
7604 @item
7605 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7606 @end itemize
7607
7608 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7609 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7610 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7611 those cases, e.g., one matching
7612
7613 @smallexample
7614 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7615 @end smallexample
7616
7617 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7618 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7619 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7620 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7621 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7622 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7623 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7624 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7625
7626 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7627 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7628 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7629 @end defmac
7630
7631 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7632 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7633 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7634 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7635 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7636 this macro.
7637 @end defmac
7638
7639 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7640 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7641 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7642 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7643 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7644 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7645 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7646 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7647 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7648 given mode.
7649 @end defmac
7650
7651 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7652 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7653 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7654 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7655 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7656 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7657 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7658 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7659 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7660 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7661 this value.
7662
7663 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7664 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7665
7666 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7667 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7668 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7669 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7670
7671 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7672 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7673 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7674 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7675 breaking the API@.
7676 @end defmac
7677
7678 @defmac Pmode
7679 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7680 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7681 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7682 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7683 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7684
7685 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7686 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7687 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7688 to @code{Pmode}.
7689 @end defmac
7690
7691 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7692 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7693 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7694 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7695 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7696 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7697 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7698 @end defmac
7699
7700 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7701 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7702 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7703 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7704 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7705 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7706
7707 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7708 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7709 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7710 @end defmac
7711
7712 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7713
7714 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7715
7716 @defmac SYSTEM_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7717 Define this macro if the system header files do not support C++@.
7718 This macro handles system header files by pretending that system
7719 header files are enclosed in @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7720 @end defmac
7721
7722 @findex #pragma
7723 @findex pragma
7724 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7725 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7726 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7727 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7728 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7729 setup required for the pragmas.
7730
7731 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7732 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7733 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7734
7735 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7736 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7737
7738 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7739 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7740 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7741 @end defmac
7742
7743 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7744 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7745
7746 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7747 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7748 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7749 pragma of the form
7750
7751 @smallexample
7752 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7753 @end smallexample
7754
7755 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7756 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7757 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7758 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7759 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7760 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7761 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7762 arguments of pragmas registered with
7763 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7764 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7765
7766 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7767 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7768 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7769 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7770 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7771 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7772 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7773 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7774 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7775 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7776 how to build this object file.
7777 @end deftypefun
7778
7779 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7780 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7781 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7782 @end defmac
7783
7784 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7785 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7786 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7787 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7788 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7789 @end defmac
7790
7791 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7792 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7793 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7794 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7795 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7796 @end defmac
7797
7798 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7799 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7800 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7801 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7802 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7803 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7804 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7805 you should define this macro.
7806
7807 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7808 @end defmac
7809
7810 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7811 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7812 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7813 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7814 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7815 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7816 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7817 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7818 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7819 slot of @var{insn}.
7820
7821 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7822 @end defmac
7823
7824 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7825 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7826 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7827 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7828 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7829 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7830
7831 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7832 @end defmac
7833
7834 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7835
7836 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7837 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7838 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7839 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7840 separate math library.
7841
7842 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7843 @end defmac
7844
7845 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7846 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7847 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7848
7849 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7850 is wrong.
7851 @end defmac
7852
7853 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7854 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7855 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7856 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7857 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7858 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7859 for cross-profiling.
7860 @end defmac
7861
7862 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7863
7864 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7865 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7866 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7867 1 if it does use cc0.
7868 @end defmac
7869
7870 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7871 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7872 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7873 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7874 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7875 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7876 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7877 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7878 @end defmac
7879
7880 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7881 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7882 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7883 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7884 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7885 @end defmac
7886
7887 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7888 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7889 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7890 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7891 about the currently processed blocks.
7892 @end defmac
7893
7894 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7895 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7896 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7897 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7898 to by @var{ce_info}.
7899 @end defmac
7900
7901 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7902 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7903 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7904 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7905 to by @var{ce_info}.
7906 @end defmac
7907
7908 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
7909 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
7910 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7911 to by @var{ce_info}.
7912 @end defmac
7913
7914 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7915
7916 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
7917
7918 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
7919
7920 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
7921
7922 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
7923
7924 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
7925
7926 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
7927
7928 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
7929
7930 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
7931
7932 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
7933
7934 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
7935
7936 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
7937
7938 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
7939
7940 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
7941
7942 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
7943
7944 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
7945
7946 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
7947
7948 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
7949
7950 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
7951 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
7952 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
7953 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
7954 @end defmac
7955
7956 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
7957 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
7958 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
7959 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
7960 executable files.
7961 @end defmac
7962
7963 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
7964 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
7965 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
7966 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
7967 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
7968 lists.
7969 @end defmac
7970
7971 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
7972 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
7973 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
7974 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
7975 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
7976 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
7977 defined as this expression:
7978
7979 @smallexample
7980 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
7981 build_tree_list
7982 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
7983 NULL))
7984 @end smallexample
7985 @end defmac
7986
7987 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
7988
7989 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
7990
7991 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
7992
7993 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
7994
7995 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
7996
7997 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
7998
7999 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
8000
8001 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
8002 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
8003 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
8004 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
8005 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
8006 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
8007 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
8008 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
8009 @end defmac
8010
8011 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8012 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8013 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
8014 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
8015 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8016 @end deftypefn
8017
8018 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8019 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8020 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8021 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8022 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8023 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8024 @end deftypefn
8025
8026 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8027 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8028 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8029 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8030 that are different from @option{-I}.
8031 @end deftypefn
8032
8033 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8034 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8035 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8036 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8037 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8038 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8039 @end defmac
8040
8041 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8042 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8043 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8044 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8045 @end defmac
8046
8047 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8048 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8049 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8050 @end defmac
8051
8052 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8053 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8054 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8055 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8056 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8057 @end defmac
8058
8059 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8060 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8061 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8062 @end defmac
8063
8064 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8065 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8066 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8067 and scanf formatter settings.
8068 @end defmac
8069
8070 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8071
8072 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8073
8074 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8075
8076 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8077
8078 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8079
8080 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8081
8082 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
8083 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8084 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8085 @end defmac
8086
8087 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8088 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8089 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8090 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8091 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8092 @end defmac
8093
8094 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8095
8096 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8097
8098 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8099
8100 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8101
8102 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8103
8104 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8105
8106 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8107
8108 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8109
8110 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8111
8112 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8113
8114 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8115
8116 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8117
8118 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8119
8120 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8121 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8122 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8123 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8124 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8125 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8126 representation.
8127
8128 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8129 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8130 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8131 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8132 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8133
8134 @itemize @bullet
8135 @item
8136 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8137 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8138 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8139
8140 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8141 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8142 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8143 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8144 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8145 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8146 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8147 not really a large change.
8148
8149 @item
8150 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8151 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8152 port in this code.
8153
8154 @item
8155 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8156 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8157 @end itemize
8158
8159 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8160 maintainer is familiar with.
8161
8162 @end defmac
8163
8164 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SPECULATION_SAFE_VALUE
8165
8166 @hook TARGET_SPECULATION_SAFE_VALUE
8167
8168 @hook TARGET_RUN_TARGET_SELFTESTS